COP_Alfa MiTo GB

8-03-2012

8:54

Pagina 1

ENGLISHOWNER HANDBOOK

Alfa Services

Alfawiki.nl

COP_Alfa MiTo GB

8-03-2012

8:54

Pagina 2

WHY CHOOSINGGENUINE PARTS

We really know your car because we invented, designed and built it: we really know every single detail.
At Alfa Romeo Service authorised workshops you can find technicians directly trained by us,
offering quality and professionalism for all service operations.
Alfa Romeo workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations, season checks
and practical recommendations by our experts.
With Alfa Romeo Genuine Parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance featuresof your new car unchanged in time: that's why you bought it for.
Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our cars; we recommend them because
they come from our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies.
For all these reasons: rely on Genuine Parts, because they are the only ones
designed by Alfa Romeo for your car.

SAFETY:BRAKING SYSTEMENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS,
CLIMATE CONTROL MAINTENANCE

Alfawiki.nl

COMFORT: SUSPENSION
AND WINDSCREEN WIPERSPERFORMANCE: SPARK PLUGS,INJECTORS AND BATTERIESLINEACCESSORIROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS

Alfawiki.nl

Alfawiki.nl

Dear Customer,
we would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.
We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your car and use it in the best possible way. Please read it all the way
through before taking your car on the road for the first time.
Here you will find information, tips and important warnings regarding use of your car and how to achieve the best performance from the technologicalfeatures of your Alfa Romeo. The handbook also provides a description of special features and tips as well as essential information for correct care,maintenance, safety of car driving and use and preservation of your Alfa Romeo over time.
Carefully read the warnings and indications marked with the following symbols:
personal safety;
car safety;
environmental protection.
The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its Customers:❒ the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity;❒ the range of additional services available to Alfa Romeo Customers.
We are confident that these instructions will help you become familiar with your new car and the Alfa Romeo after-sales staff who will be at yourservice.
Enjoy reading. Happy motoring!

This Owner Handbook describes all versions of the Alfa MiTo; please consider only the information
relevant to your version, engine and configuration. All data contained in this publication are purely
indicative. Fiat Group Automobiles can modify the specifications of the vehicle model described in thispublication at any time, for technical or marketing purposes. For further information, contact an Alfa
Romeo Dealership.

Alfawiki.nl

VERY IMPORTANT
REFUELLING

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIESPetrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol withoctane rating (RON) not less than 95 in compliance with theEuropean Standard EN228.
Diesel engines: refuel only with diesel fuel conforming to
the European specification EN590. The use of other products
or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair andconsequently invalidate the warranty, due to the damage
caused.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Petrol engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged,
set the gear lever to neutral, fully depress the clutch without
depressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV
and release it as soon as the engine has started.
Diesel engines: turn the ignition key to MAR and wait forandto go out; then turn thethe warning lights
ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has
started.
PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during
operation. Do not park the car on grass, dry leaves, pineneedles or other flammable material: fire hazard.
RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
The car is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous
diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help
protect the environment.

Alfawiki.nl

If after having purchased the car you decide to add
accessories requiring electricity (with the risk of graduallydraining the battery), contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services. They can calculate the overall electric requirement
and check that the car's electric system can support therequired load.
CODE card(for versions/markets, where provided)

Keep it in a safe place, not in the car. We recommend thatyou always carry the electronic code provided on the CODE
card with you, in case you need to perform an emergency
start.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring that it
maintains its performance and its safety features, its
environmental friendliness and low running costs for a longtime to come.
THE OWNER MANUAL CONTAINS…
...important information, advice and warnings for correct use,
driving safety and maintenance of your car over time.
Particular attention should be paid to information marked
with the following symbols: (personal safety)(environmental protection) (car integrity).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CARDASHBOARD

The presence and position of the controls, instruments and indicators may vary according to the different versions.

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
fig. 1

A0J0330

1. Diffuser for directing air to the side windows 2. Adjustable air vent 3. Exterior light control lever 4. Instrument panel 5. Windscreen wiper/rear
window wiper/trip computer control lever 6. Car radio (for versions/markets, where provided) 7. Adjustable air diffusers 8. Hazard warning lights,
door locking/unlocking button 9. Passenger front airbag 10. Glove compartment 11. Heating/ventilation/climate control system controls 12. Gear
lever 13. "Alfa DNA" system 14. Ignition device 15. Driver side front knee bag (for versions/markets, where provided) 16. Driver front airbag
17. Cruise Control lever (for versions/markets, where provided) 18. Fuse box access flap 19. Panel with various controls.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
3

CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS
GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

VERSIONS WITH MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAYSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY
fig. 2SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

A0J0349

A. Speedometer (speed indicator) B. Multifunction display C. Rev counter D. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light E. Engine coolant
temperature gauge with overheating warning light

Warning lights supplied on diesel versions only. On diesel versions, the end of scale for the rev counter is 6000 rpm
IMPORTANT The illumination of the instrument panel graphics may vary according to version.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
4

VERSIONS WITH RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAYGETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

fig. 3

A0J0263

A. Speedometer (speed indicator) B. Reconfigurable multifunction display C. Rev counter D. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light E. Engine
coolant temperature gauge with overheating warning light

IN AN EMERGENCY

Warning lights supplied on diesel versions only. On diesel versions, the end of scale for the rev counter is 6000 rpm
IMPORTANT The illumination of the instrument panel graphics may vary according to version.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
5

SPEEDOMETER (SPEED INDICATOR)GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CARThis shows the speed of the car.

This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant. The
warning light in the gauge lights up to indicate an increase in coolant
temperature; in the event of this happening, switch off the engine
and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

REV COUNTER
This indicates the engine rpm.

SAFETYENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGEFUEL LEVEL GAUGEThis shows the amount of fuel left in the tank.

STARTING AND
DRIVING

0 - tank empty.
1 - tank full
The warning light in the gauge switches on when there are 5 to 7 litresof fuel remaining in the tank; if this happens, refuel at the earliest
opportunity.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
6

WARNING LIGHTS ON PANEL

Handbrake on (red)General warnings
The warning lights switch on together with a dedicated message
and/or acoustic signal where appropriate.
These indications are concise and precautionary and, as such, mustnot be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information
contained in this Owner Handbook, which you are recommended toread carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this section in the event of a failure
indication.

Turning the key to the MAR position illuminates the warning light, but itshould switch off after a few seconds.
The warning light (or symbol on the display) switches on when thehandbrake is engaged. If the car is moving the buzzer will also sound.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT If the warning light comes on when the vehicle is inmotion, check that the handbrake is not engaged.

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

Low brake fluid level (red)Turning the key to the MAR position illuminates the warning light, but itshould switch off after a few seconds.
The warning light (or symbol on the display) comes on when the levelof the brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the minimum level,
possibly due to leaks in the circuit.
The display will show the dedicated message.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
7

EBD failure

ABS FAILURE (amber)

The simultaneous switching on of the(red) and(amber)warning lights with the engine on, indicates either a failure of the EBD
system or that the system is not available. In this case, the rear wheels
may suddenly lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking sharply.
Drive with extreme caution straight to the nearest Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to have the system checked.
The display will show the dedicated message.

Turning the key to the MAR position illuminates the warning light, but itshould switch off after a few seconds.
The warning light (or symbol on the display) lights up when the system
is inefficient. Under these circumstances the braking system will work
as normal without the extra performance offered by the ABS system.
Drive with caution and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services assoon as possible.
The display will show the dedicated message.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

Brake pad wear (amber)
IN AN EMERGENCY(for versions/markets, where provided)
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

The warning light (or symbol on the display) switches on when thefront and rear brake pads are worn. In this situation, replace as soon
as possible.
The display will show the dedicated message.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
8

Airbag failure (red)Passenger side airbag/sidebags deactivated (amber)

Turning the key to the MAR position illuminates the warning light, but itshould switch off after a few seconds.
The warning light stays on constantly if there is a failure in the airbag
system.
The display will show the dedicated message.

The warning light switches on when the front passenger side airbag
and side bag are disabled.
With front passenger airbag on, when the ignition key is turned toMAR, the warning light switches on constantly for several seconds,
flashes for another few seconds and then should switch off.

If, when the key is turned to MAR, the warning
light does not come on or if it stays on with the vehicle
in motion (together with the message on the display)there could be a failure in the restraint systems; under thesecircumstances the airbags or pretensioners may not be triggeredin the event of an accident or, more rarely, they could betriggered accidentally. Before proceeding, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to have the system checked immediately.

A failure of the warning light is indicated by thewarning light switching on. In addition, the airbag
system automatically disables the airbags on thepassenger's side (front and side bags where provided). Before
proceeding, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have thesystem checked immediately.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

The failure of the warning light is indicated by the
flashing, for more than the normal 4 seconds, of thefront passenger airbag deactivated warning light .
In addition, the airbag system automatically disables the airbags
on the passenger’s side (front airbag and side bags forversions/markets, where provided). In this case, the warning
light may not indicate a fault in the restraint systems. Before
proceeding, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have thesystem checked immediately.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
9

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

Seat belts not fastened (red)(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light remains on steadily with the car at stationary andthe driver's seat belt not correctly fastened.
The warning light will flash and a buzzer will sound if the vehicle is inmotion and the front seat belts are not correctly fastened.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services if you wish to permanently
deactivate the SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system buzzer. The system canbe reactivated using the Set-up Menu.

Electric power steering failure(red)This warning light switches on when the ignition key is turned to MAR,but it should switch off after a few seconds.
If the warning light (or symbol on the display) stays on, you will nothave steering assistance and the effort required to operate the steering
wheel will be significantly increased; steering is, however, possible.
The display will show the dedicated message.
In this case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
Start&Stop system
deactivation (amber)Low battery charge (red)(for versions/markets, where provided)
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light switches on
but should switch off as soon as the engine is started (with the engine
idling, a brief delay is acceptable).
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services if the warning light (orsymbol on the display) remains on or flashes.

The warning light switches on when the Start&Stop system isdeactivated by pressing the button on the auxiliary control panel next
to the steering wheel.
A specific message is displayed on certain versions.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
10

CONSTANTLY ON: Low engine
oil pressure (red)FLASHING: Engine oil deteriorated(for versions/markets, where provided - red)
When the key is turned to MAR the warning light comes on, but should
go out as soon as the engine is started.
1. Low engine oil pressure
The warning light switches on constantly together (for versions/markets, where provided) with a message on the display when thesystem detects that the engine oil pressure is too low.
If thewarning light turns on when driving (onsome versions, together with the message on the display),stop the car immediately and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
2. Engine oil deteriorated(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light will start to flash together with the specific message
on the display (for versions/markets, where provided).

Depending on the versions, the warning light flashing modes are as
follows:❒ for 1 minute every two hours;❒ cycles of 3 minutes with intervals with the warning light off for 5
seconds until the oil is changed.
After the first indication, at each engine start-up the warning light willcontinue flashing as described above until the oil is changed. The
display shows a dedicated message (for versions/markets, where
provided) together with the warning light. The flashing of this warning
light should not be considered as a fault; it informs the customer thatthe oil needs to be changed following normal car use. Remember thatthe deterioration of the engine oil is accelerated by:❒ mainly town use of the car which makes the DPF regeneration
process more frequent;❒ use of the car for short drives, in which the engine does not havetime to reach its regular operating temperature;❒ repeated interruption of the regeneration process, signalled by the
DPF warning light coming on.
If the warning light switches on, the deteriorated
engine oil must be changed as soon as possible, andnever more than 500 km from the first time that thewarning light switches on. Failure to observe the above may
result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate thewarranty. Remember that the operation of this warning light is
not related to the amount of oil in the engine. Therefore, never
top up with oil when the warning light starts flashing.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
11

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSEngine coolant overheating(red)
Turning the key to the MAR position illuminates the warning light, but itshould switch off after a few seconds.
The warning light turns on when the engine is overheated.
The display will show the dedicated message.
If the warning light comes on when driving, proceed as follows:❒ normal driving conditions: stop the car, switch off the engine andcheck that the water level in the reservoir is not below the MIN
mark. In this case, wait for a few minutes for the engine to cool
down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, top up with coolant
and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX reference
on the reservoir itself. Also check visually for any fluid leaks. If thewarning light comes on again at the next engine start-up, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
❒ If the car is used under demanding conditions (e.g. towing trailers
uphill or fully loaded): slow down and, if the light stays on, stop
the car. Stand for 2 or 3 minutes with the engine running andslightly accelerated to promote a better circulation of coolant. Thenstop the engine. Check the correct liquid level as described above.

Doors not closed correctly(red)(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light (or symbol on the display) lights up when one ormore doors or the tailgate are not closed correctly. An acoustic signal
is activated with the doors open and the car moving.
On some versions the warning light (or symbol on the display) also
lights up when the bonnet is not closed correctly.

IMPORTANT Under severe use of the car, it is advisable to keep theengine on and slightly accelerated for a few minutes before switching it
off.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
12

EOBD/injection system failure(amber)Under normal conditions, when the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON,
the warning light switches on, but should switch off as soon as theengine is started.
If the warning light remains on or comes on whilst driving, it meansthat the injection system is not working properly; in particular, if thewarning light comes on constantly, this indicates a malfunction in the
supply/ignition system that could cause excessive exhaust emissions, apossible loss of performance, poor driveability and high fuelconsumption.
A specific message is displayed on certain versions.
Under these conditions, you may continue travelling at moderate speed
without demanding excessive effort from the engine. Prolonged use of
the car with the warning light on may cause damage.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible.
The warning light goes out after the fault disappears, but the
notification is stored in the system.

NOTE (valid only for petrol engines)
If the warning light is flashing, this indicates that the catalytic converter
may be damaged.
If the warning light comes on intermittently, release the accelerator
pedal to lower the speed of the engine until the warning light stops
flashing; continue the journey at moderate speed, trying to avoid
driving conditions that may cause further flashing and contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible
if thewarning light does not light up or if, while
travelling, the warning light comes on either constantly or
flashing (in combination with a message on the display on someversions). The operation of warning lightmay be checked by the
traffic police using specific devices. Follow the laws in force in the
country where you are driving.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
13

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

VDC system (amber)(for versions/markets, where provided)

Alfa Romeo CODE system
failure/Alarm failure (amber)(for versions/markets, where provided)

This warning light switches on when the ignition key is turned to MAR,but it should switch off after a few seconds.
If the warning light (or the symbol on the display) does not switch off,
or if it remains lit when driving, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
A specific message is displayed on certain versions.
The warning light flashes while driving to indicate the intervention of
the VDC system.
ASR failure

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXThe warning light (or symbol on the display) will come on (on someversions, with a message on the display) to indicate an Alfa Romeo
CODE system or alarm failure (for versions/markets, where provided).
In this case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as
possible.
Break-in attempt
If this warning light flashes or, on some versions, if the symbol appears
in the display (together with a message) this indicates a break-in
attempt. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible.

Turning the key to the MAR position illuminates the warning light, but itshould switch off after a few seconds.
If the warning light (or the symbol on the display) does not switch off,
or if it remains lit when driving, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
A specific message is displayed on certain versions.
The warning light flashes while driving to indicate the intervention of
the ASR system.
Hill Holder failureThis warning light comes on, on some versions together with thesymbol and a message in the display, in the event of a fault with
the Hill Holder system.
In this case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Alfawiki.nl
14

Glow plug preheating (diesel
versions) (amber)

Water in diesel filter (diesel
versions) (amber)This warning light switches on when the key is turned to MAR. It willswitch off as soon as the heater plugs have reached a preset
temperature. The engine can be started as soon as the warning lightswitches off.

The warning light remains on constantly when driving (together with amessage in the display), to indicate the presence of water in the
diesel filter.

IMPORTANT In mild or high temperature conditions, the warning lightcomes on for an extremely short time.

The presence of water in the fuel supply circuit may cause
severe damage to the injection system and irregular engine
operation. If the warning light comes on in the
instrument panel (together with a message in the display) contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible to bleed the system.
Water may have entered the tank if this appears immediately after
refuelling: if this happens, switch the engine off immediately andcontact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Glow plug preheating failure (diesel
versions)
The warning light will flash (a message will appear on the display, onsome versions) to indicate a fault in the glow plugs preheating system.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible toeliminate the fault.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
15

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

Fuel reserve – Limited range(amber)This warning light switches on when 5 to 7 litres of fuel are left in thetank.
When the remaining range is lower than approx. 50 km (or equivalentvalue in miles), on some versions, the display will show a warning
message.
If the warning light flashes with the car in motion,
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

Cruise control (green)(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light comes on when the key is turned to MAR, but should
go out after a few seconds if the Cruise Control function is off.
The warning light comes on when the Cruise Control ring nut is turnedto the ON position (see the “Cruise Control” paragraph in this section).
The display will show the dedicated message.

DPF (diesel particulate filter)cleaning in progress (onlydiesel versions with DPF)
(amber)Turning the key to the MAR position illuminates the warning light, but itshould switch off after a few seconds.
The warning light switches on constantly to indicate that the DPF systemneeds to eliminate the trapped pollutants (particulate) through theregeneration process.
The warning light does not switch on during every DPF regeneration,but only when driving conditions require that the driver is notified.
To switch the warning light off, the car must be kept moving until theregeneration process is completed.
On average, the process lasts fifteen minutes. Optimal conditions forcompleting the process are achieved by travelling at 60 km/h withengine revs above 2000 rpm.
When this warning light switches on, it does not indicate a fault withthe car and it should therefore not be taken to a workshop.
On some versions, together with the warning light, the display shows adedicated message.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
16

The driving speed must always be suitable for traffic
and weather conditions and the driver must always
comply with the Highway Code. The engine can be
stopped even if the DPF warning light is on: however, repeatedinterruptions of the regeneration process could cause premature
deterioration of the engine oil. For this reason, always wait until
the warning light switches off before stopping the engine as
described above. It is not advisable to complete DPF regeneration
with the car stationary.

Start&Stop failure(for versions/markets, where provided)

Speed limit exceeded (red)(for versions/markets, where provided)
This warning light (for versions/markets, where provided) comes onwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 120 km/h.
When the car exceeds the speed limit set in the Set-up Menu (e.g. 120km/h), on some versions a message and a symbol are shown in thedisplay and an acoustic signal is activated.
General failure (amber)(for versions/markets, where provided)
The warning light switches on in the circumstances indicated below.
In these circumstances, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services assoon as possible to eliminate the fault.
Exterior lights fault
See description for thewarning light.

The warning light comes on when a failure is detected in theStart&Stop system.
Rain sensor failure(for versions/markets, where provided)
warning light.
See the description for theParking sensor failure(for versions/markets, where provided)
See the description for thewarning light.

Dusk sensor failure(for versions/markets, where provided)
This warning light comes on when a dusk sensor failure is detected.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

Engine oil pressure sensor failure
The warning light turns on when failure is detected in the engine oilpressure sensor. The display shows the dedicated message.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

Brake lights failure
See description for “Brake lights failure”.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

Fuel cut-off
This warning light comes on when the fuel cut-off inertia switch is
triggered. The display shows the dedicated message.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
17

Rear fog light (amber)

Main beam headlights (blue)

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR
The warning light switches on when the rear fog light is switched on.
Front fog lights (green)

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

Left direction indicator(green)

The warning light switches on when the fog lights are switched on.
Side lights (green)

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSThis warning light comes on when the direction indicator control leveris moved downwards and when the hazard warning light button ispressed.
Right direction indicator(green)This warning light comes on when the side lights are turned on.
Follow me home (green)

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

The warning light switches on when the main beam headlights are
switched on.

The warning light switches on (together with a message shown on thedisplay) when this device is in use (see “Follow me home device”
paragraph in this section).

2

The warning light switches on when the direction indicator stalk is
moved upwards or when the hazard warning light button is pressed.

Dipped headlights (green)

The warning light switches on when the dipped headlights are
switched on.
INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
18

Tyre pressure low(for versions/markets, where provided)
This warning light (or symbol on the display) switches on (on someversions together with a message on the display) (together with an
acoustic signal) if the pressure in one or more tyres drops below apreset threshold.
In this way the TPMS warns the driver that one or more tyres may be
dangerously flat and liable to puncture.

TPMS failureThis warning light (or symbol on the display) switches on (on someversions together with a message on the display) when a TPMS fault is
detected.
In this case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as
possible.
Should one or more wheels be fitted without sensors, the display willshow a warning message until initial conditions are restored.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

IMPORTANT Do not continue driving with one or more flat tyres as
handling may be compromised. Stop the car, avoiding sharp braking
and steering. Replace the wheel immediately with the space-saver
wheel (for versions/markets, where provided) or carry out animmediate repair using the dedicated kit (see “Changing a wheel” inthe “In an emergency” section) and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services as soon as possible.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
19

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSCheck tyre pressureThis warning light (or symbol in the display) switches on (on someversions together with a message in the display) to indicate that thetyre pressure is below the value recommended to guarantee long tyre
life and low fuel consumption. It may also indicate a slow loss ofpressure.
Should two or more tyres be in the condition mentioned above, thedisplay will show the indications corresponding to each tyre insequence.
Under these circumstances you should restore the correct pressure
values (see "Technical specifications" section).

Start&Stop system
activation/deactivation(for versions/markets, where provided)
Start&Stop system fault
Start&Stop system activation
A message will appear on the display when the Start&Stop system is
activated.
The LED on the button (on the trim next to the steering wheel) is off
in this condition (see “Start&Stop” paragraph in this section).
Turning the Start&Stop off❒ Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display: a message
appears on the display when the Start&Stop system is deactivated.
❒ Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display: the symbol
and a message appear on the display when the Start&Stop system
is deactivated.
The LED on the button is on when the system is deactivated.
Start&Stop system fault
If the Start&Stop system is faulty the (versions with multifunction
display) or (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display)
symbol flashes on the display.
For versions/markets where provided, a warning message is also
displayed.
In this case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
20

Luggage compartment open
On some versions a message + symbol on the display are shown when
the luggage compartment is open.
Bonnet open
On some versions a message + symbol on the display are shown when
the bonnet is open.

Fuel cut-off
On some versions the display will show a message + symbol if the fuelcut-off intervenes.
For the fuel cut-off system reactivation procedure see paragraph “Fuelcut-off system” in this section.
Exterior lights failure

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETY

Possible presence of ice on theroad
On versions equipped with “Reconfigurable multifunction display”, amessage + symbol will appear on the display when the outdoor
temperature falls to or below 3°C.
On versions with “Multifunction display” only the dedicated message isshown.
IMPORTANT In the event of outdoor temperature sensor failure, dashes
are shown on the display instead of the value.

On some versions, the display will show a message + symbol if a fault
is detected in one of the following lights:❒ daytime running lights (DRL)❒ side lights❒ direction indicators❒ rear fog lights❒ number plate lights.
The failure relating to these lights could be: one or more blown bulbs,
a blown protection fuse or a break in the electrical connection.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
21

Parking sensor failure(for versions/markets, where provided)

Brake light failure
GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETY

On some versions the display will show a message + symbol if a fault
is detected in the brake lights.
The fault may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown protection fuse or
an interruption of the electric connection.

IN AN EMERGENCY

Dynamic Suspension failure(active shock absorber system)(for versions/markets, where provided)

Dusk sensor failure(for versions/markets, where provided)
On some versions the display will show a message + symbol if there isa fault in the dusk sensor.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGOn some versions the display will show a message + symbol if there isa fault in the parking sensors.

Rain sensor failure(for versions/markets, where provided)

On some versions, a message + symbol are displayed in the event ofactive shock absorber system failure.
In this case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as
possible.

On some versions the display will show a message + symbol if there isa fault in the rain sensor.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
22

IMPORTANT For a correct engine oil level indication, perform thecheck with the car parked on a level surface.

Display of selected driving mode(“Alfa DNA” system)(for versions/markets, where provided)
On versions equipped with a "Reconfigurable multifunction display",amessage + symbol associated with the selected driving mode “DYNAMIC”, “NATURAL” or “ALL WEATHER” - is shown.
A warning message is shown on the display if one of these driving
modes is not available.
On versions equipped with “Multifunction display”, a letter (d or a)associated with the selected driving mode is shown together witha dedicated message.

IMPORTANT To perform the engine oil reading correctly, after turning
the key to MAR-ON, wait for about 2 seconds before starting theengine.
IMPORTANT The engine oil level may increase after a long stop.

Engine oil level display(for versions/markets, where provided)
When the ignition key is turned to MAR-ON the display shows, for a
few seconds, the engine oil level. In the event of an insufficient engine
oil level, a warning message appears on the display.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYIMPORTANT To find out the correct oil quantity, always check using thedipstick (see paragraph “Checking levels” in the section “Maintenanceand care”).

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
23

DISPLAYGETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

The car may be provided with a multifunction/reconfigurable
multifunction display that shows useful information to the user,
according to the previous settings, when driving.
With the ignition key removed, the display activates and shows thetime and total milometer reading (in km or miles) for a few seconds
when a door is opened/closed.

MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY"STANDARD" SCREEN
The following information appears on the display fig. 4:
A DateB Milometer (distance covered in km or miles)
C Driving mode selected via "Alfa DNA" (dynamic car control system)(for versions/markets, where provided): d = Dynamic; n = Natural;a = All Weather
D Time (always displayed, even with key removed and doors closed)
E Start&Stop function indicator (for versions/markets where provided)
F Outside temperature
G Gear Shift Indicator (for versions/markets, where provided)
H Headlamp alignment position (only with dipped headlamps on)

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
24

fig. 4

A0J1270

RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTIONDISPLAY “STANDARD” SCREEN
The following information appears on the display fig. 5:
A TimeB Trip mileage (in km or miles)
C Milometer (distance covered in km or miles)
D Car status indications (e.g. doors open, possible ice on road,etc.)/Start&Stop function indicator (for versions/markets, where
provided)/Gear Shift Indicator (for versions/markets, where
provided)Headlampalignment position (only with dipped headlamps on)
E
F Outside temperature

On some versions, selecting “DYNAMIC” driving mode (see “Alfa DNA
system” paragraph in this section) causes the display to show theturbine pressure fig. 6.
The instrument is calibrated for engines with higher supercharging
pressures. Therefore, on some versions, it is normal for end of scale tobe reached.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 5

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0333

fig. 6

A0J0228

25

GEAR SHIFT INDICATORWELCOME MOVEMENTSTARTING AND
DRIVING

The “GSI” (Gear Shift Indicator) system advises the driver to change
gear through a specific indication on the control panel fig. 7.
Through the GSI, the driver is notified that changing gear will allow a
reduction in fuel consumption.
Therefore, for driving oriented towards reducing fuel consumption, it isrecommended to stick to "Natural" or "All Weather" mode and tofollow the suggestions of the Gear Shift Indicator, where the traffic
conditions allow it.
When the SHIFT UP icon ( SHIFT) is shown on the display, the GSI isadvising the driver to engage a higher gear, while the SHIFT DOWN
( SHIFT) icon advises the driver to engage a lower gear.

IN AN EMERGENCY

Note The indication in the instrument panel remains on until the driver
shifts gear or the driving conditions go back to a situation wheregearshifting is not required to improve consumption.

On some versions, when the key is turned to MAR-ON, the following
occurs:❒ quick movement (up and down) of the speedometer and rpm gauge;❒ lighting of graphic symbols/display;❒ displaying of an animated graphic representation of the vehicle
profile.
Gauge movement❒ If the key is removed from the ignition switch whilst the gauges are
moving, they immediately go back to their initial position.
❒ Once they have reached the full scale values, the gauges rest on thevalue indicated by the vehicle.
❒ The movement of the gauges stops when the engine is started.
Lighting of graphic symbols/display
A few seconds after the key is inserted, the gauges, graphic symbols
and display light up in sequence.
Display of graphic animation
When the key is removed from the ignition switch (with the doors
closed), the display remains lit up and shows a graphic animation.
The display lighting is then dimmed gradually until it goes out
completely.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 726

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0233

CONTROL BUTTONSSETUP MENU"+" or(versions with Start&Stop system): to scroll upwards
through the screen and the related options or to increase the displayed
value fig. 8.
MENU ESC: brief press to access the menu and/or go to the nextscreen or confirm your choice. Long press to return to the standard
screen.
"–" or(versions with Start&Stop system): to scroll downwards
through the screen and the related options or to decrease the displayed
value.

The menu comprises a series of options which can be selected using
the "+" and "–" buttons (orandfor versions with
Start&Stop system) to access the different selection and setting
operations (Setup) indicated below.
Some items have a submenu. The menu can be activated by briefly
pressing the MENU ESC button.
The menu comprises the following options:❒ MENU❒ SPEED BEEP
❒ LIGHT SENSOR (for versions/markets where provided)❒ RAIN SENSOR (for versions/markets, where provided)❒ TRIP B ACTIVATION/DATA❒ SET TIME❒ SET DATE
❒ FIRST PAGE (for versions/markets where provided)❒ SEE RADIO❒ AUTOCLOSE❒ MEASUREMENT UNIT
❒ LANGUAGE❒ BUZZER VOLUME❒ BUTTON VOLUME❒ SEAT BELT BEEP/BUZZ

andfor
IMPORTANT The "+" and "–" buttons (orversions with Start&Stop system) activate different functions according
to the following situations:❒ within the menu, they allow you to scroll up and down through theoptions;❒ during settings operations, they increase or decrease values.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 8Alfawiki.nl
A0J0024

27

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR❒ SERVICE❒ AIRBAG/PASSENGER BAG❒ DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS❒ COURTESY LIGHTS❒ MENU EXIT

SAFETY

Note On cars equipped with radio navigator systems (for versions/markets, where provided), some menu items are shown on thenavigator display.

STARTING AND
DRIVING

Selecting an option from the main
menu without a submenu:❒ briefly press the MENU ESC button to select the main menu option
you wish to modify;❒ press the "+" or "–" buttons (with single presses) to select the new
setting;❒ a short press on button MENU ESC will store the setting and thenreturn to the same main menu option that was first selected.

IN AN EMERGENCY

Selecting an option from the main
menu with a submenu:❒ a short press on MENU ESC button will display the first submenu
option;❒ press the "+" or "–" buttons (with single presses) to scroll through all
the submenu options;❒ a short press on MENU ESC button will select the displayed
submenu option and enter the associated setting menu;❒ press the "+" or "–" buttons (with single presses) to select the new
setting for this submenu option;❒ a short press on button MENU ESC will store the setting and thenreturn to the same submenu option that was first selected.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
28

MENU ITEMS

To cancel the setting proceed as follows:❒ briefly press MENU ESC: (On) will flash on the display;❒ press the - button to make the display flash (Off);❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly to return to the menu screen or
hold the button down to return to the standard screen withoutstoring.

Menu
This option allows you to access the Setup Menu. Press the "+" or "-"button to select the various Menu options. Hold down the MENU
ESC button to return to the standard screen.
Speed Beep (Speed limit)

Headlight sensor (Automatic
headlight/dusk sensor sensitivity
adjustment)(for versions/markets, where provided)

This function may be used to set the car speed limit (km/h or mph);
when this limit is exceeded the driver is alerted.
To set the desired speed limit, proceed as follows:❒ briefly press the MENU ESC button to make the display show thewords (Speed Beep);❒ press the "-" or "+" button to select speed limit activation (On) or
deactivation (Off);❒ when the function is activated (On), press the "+" or "-" buttons to
select the desired speed limit and press MENU ESC to confirm thechoice.
IMPORTANT Setting is possible between 30 and 200 km/h, or 20 and
125 mph, according to the previously set unit. See the "Measurement
unit (Measurement unit adjustment)" paragraph described below.
The setting will increase/decrease by 5 units each time the +/- button
is pressed. Hold down the +/- button for fast automatic increase/decrease. Complete the setting by with single presses of the button
when you approach the required value.
❒ Press the MENU ESC button briefly to return to the menu screen or
hold the button down to return to the standard screen withoutstoring.

This function enables the headlights to come on or go off depending on
external lighting conditions.
The dusk sensor sensitivity can be adjusted according to 3 levels (level
1= minimum sensitivity, level 2= average sensitivity, level 3= maximum
sensitivity).
The higher the sensitivity set, the lesser is the external light variationneeded to switch the lights on (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset
the headlights come on in advance in relation to levels 1 and 2).
Proceed as follows to set the desired adjustment:❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly to make the display flash thepreviously stored level;❒ press the + or - button to select;❒ briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the menu screen or
hold it down to return to the standard screen without storing.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
29

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXRain sensor (Rain sensor sensitivity
adjustment)This function allows you to adjust the rain sensor sensitivity to 4 levels.
To set the required sensitivity level proceed as follows:❒ briefly press MENU ESC: the previously set sensitivity level will flashon the display;❒ press the + or - button to adjust;❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly to return to the menu screen or
hold the button down to return to the standard screen withoutstoring.
Activation/Trip B data (Trip B
enablement)This function may be used to activate (On) or deactivate (Off) the Trip B(partial trip). For further information see “Trip computer”.
Proceed as follows to switch the function on and off:
❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly to make the display flash On or
Off according to the previous setting;❒ press the + or - button to select;❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly to return to the menu screen or
hold the button down to return to the standard screen withoutstoring.

Time adjustment (Clock adjustment)This function enables the clock to be set through two sub-menus:“Time” and “Format”.
To carry out the adjustment, proceed as follows:❒ briefly press MENU ESC: the display will show the two submenus“Time” and “Mode”;❒ press the + or - button to move between the two submenus;❒ once the submenu to be modified has been selected, briefly press the
MENU ESC button;❒ when you select the “Time” submenu, pressing MENU ESC briefly
makes the "hours" flash on the display;❒ press the + or - button to adjust;❒ briefly press MENU ESC: the “minutes” will flash on the display;❒ press the + or - button to adjust.
IMPORTANT Each press on the + or - buttons causes an increase or
decrease of one unit. Hold down the button to increase/decrease thesetting rapidly and automatically. Complete the setting by with single
presses of the button when you approach the required value.
❒ If you select “Format” submenu, pressing MENU ESC briefly makes
the display mode flash on the display;❒ press + or - to select “24h” or “12h”.
When you have made the required adjustments, briefly press button
MENU ESC to go back to the submenu screen or hold the button down
to go back to the main menu screen without saving.
❒ hold the MENU ESC button down again to go back to the standard
screen or to the main menu according to the position in the menu.

Alfawiki.nl
30

Set date (Setting the date)
Using this function it is possible to change the date (day – month –year).
Proceed as follows to start the update:❒ briefly press MENU ESC: “year” will flash on the display;❒ press the + or - button to adjust;❒ briefly press MENU ESC: “month” will flash on the display;❒ press the + or - button to adjust;❒ briefly press MENU ESC: “day” will flash on the display;❒ press the + or - button to adjust.
IMPORTANT Each press on the + or - buttons causes an increase or
decrease of one unit. Hold the button down to increase/decrease thesetting rapidly and automatically. Complete the setting by with single
presses of the button when you approach the required value.
❒ Briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the menu screen or
hold it down to return to the standard screen without storing.

First page (Display of information on
the main screen)(for versions/markets, where provided)
This function allows you to choose the information you would like to
see on the main screen. You can view the date or the trip distance.
To make your choice, proceed as follows:❒ briefly press MENU ESC: “First page” will appear on the display;❒ briefly press MENU ESC again to show the display options: “Date”
and “Engine info”;❒ press + or - to select the information you wish to see on the main
screen of the display;❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly to return to the menu screen or
hold the button down to return to the standard screen withoutstoring.
When the key is turned to MAR-ON and the initial check stage is over,the display will show the information selected via the “First page”
menu function.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
31

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

See radio (audio information
display)

Unit of measurement (Setting theunit of measurement)This function is used to display radio information.
❒ Radio: selected radio station frequency or RDS message, automatictuning activation or AutoSTore;❒ Audio CD, MP3 CDs: track number;❒ CD Changer: CD number and track number;
To show the sound system information on the display (On) or clear it(Off), proceed as follows:❒ briefly press the MENU ESC button, making the display flash On or
Off depending on the previous setting;❒ press the + or - button to select;❒ briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the menu screen or
hold it down to return to the standard screen without storing.

With this function it is possible to set the units through three submenus:"Distances", "Consumption" and "Temperature".
To set the desired measurement unit, proceed as follows:❒ briefly press the MENU ESC button, to display the three submenus;❒ press the + or - button to move between the three submenus;❒ once the submenu to be modified has been selected, briefly press the
MENU ESC button;❒ when you select “Distances”, briefly pressing MENU ESC makes thedisplay show "km" or "mi" depending on the previous setting;❒ press the + or - button to select;❒ when you select “Consumption”, briefly pressing MENU ESC makes
km/l, l/100km or mpg appear on the display depending on theprevious setting;If the set distance unit is "km", the fuel consumption unit will be
displayed in km/l or l/100 km.

Autoclose (Automatic door lock
operation with car running)
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

32

When activated (On), this function locks the doors automatically whenthe vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h.
Proceed as follows to activate or deactivate this function:❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly to display a submenu;❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly to make the display flash On or
Off according to the previous setting;❒ press the + or - button to select;❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly to go back to the submenu
screen or hold the button down to go back to the main menu screen
without storing;❒ hold the MENU ESC button down again to go back to theAlfawiki.nl
standard
screen or to the main menu according to the position in the menu.

If the distance unit set is “mi” the fuel consumption unit will be
displayed in “mpg”.
❒ press the + or - button to select;❒ when you select “Temperature”, pressing MENU ESC makes °C or °F
appear on the display depending on the previous setting;❒ press the + or - button to select;
When you have made the required adjustments, briefly press button
MENU ESC to go back to the submenu screen or hold the button down
to go back to the main menu screen without saving.
❒ Hold the MENU ESC button down again to go back to the standard
screen or to the main menu according to the position in the menu.

Warnings volume (Adjusting thealert/warning acoustic signal
volume)Language (Language selection)

Button volume (Button volume
adjustment)

Display messages can be shown in different languages: Italian,English, German, Portuguese, Spanish, French, Dutch, Turkish andBrazilian.
To set the desired language proceed as follows:❒ briefly press MENU ESC: the previously set “language” will flash on
the display;❒ press the + or - button to select;❒ briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the menu screen or
hold it down to return to the standard screen without storing.

With this function it is possible to adjust (to eight levels) the volume of
the acoustic signal which sounds in the event of alerts and warning.
To set the desired volume proceed as follows:❒ briefly press MENU ESC: the previously set volume level will flash on
the display;❒ press the + or - button to adjust;❒ briefly press the MENU ESC button to return to the menu screen or
hold it down to return to the standard screen without storing.

With this function it is possible to adjust (to eight levels) the volume of
the acoustic signal when the SET ESC button is held down to exit a
sub-menu and return to the standard menu.
To set the desired volume proceed as follows:❒ briefly press the MENU ESC button: the previously set volume level
will be displayed;❒ press the + or - button to adjust the volume; an acoustic signal equal
to the volume level being selected is emitted during this adjustment;❒ briefly press the MENU ESC button to go back to the previous screen
or hold the button down to go back to the standard screen without
saving.
On versions with reconfigurable multifunction display, the volume levelis represented by bars.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
33

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXBelt reminder (Reactivation of SBR
buzzer)(for versions/markets, where provided)
This function can only be displayed after Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services have deactivated the SBR system (see "SBR system" in the"Safety" chapter).
Service (Scheduled servicing)With this function it is possible to view information on servicing
deadlines depending on kilometres travelled or daily intervals.
With the Service function it is also possible to view the interval (inkilometres or miles) before the next engine oil change is due.
To consult this information, proceed as follows:❒ briefly press the MENU ESC button, which makes the display show
the service interval in km or mi according to the previous setting(see "Distance units of measurement" paragraph);❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly to return to the menu screen or
hold the button down to return to the standard screen.

IMPORTANT According to the “Scheduled Servicing Plan”, the car must
be serviced every 30,000 km (petrol versions) or 35,000 km (diesel
versions). This message is displayed automatically when the key isturned to MAR-ON, starting at 2,000 km (or equivalent value in miles)
from when the next service is due and reappearing every 200 km (orequivalent value in miles). Below 200 km servicing indications are
more frequent. The display will be in km or mi depending on themeasurement unit settings. When the next scheduled service isapproaching and the key is turned to MAR-ON, the word Service willappear on the display, followed by the number of kilometres or miles
left. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services where the "Scheduled
Servicing Plan" operations will be performed and the message will bereset.
Airbag/Passenger bag(Activation/deactivation front
passenger side bag and Side bag forchest/pelvis protection)
This function is used to activate/deactivate the passenger side air bag.
Proceed as follows:❒ press the MENU ESC button and, after the message Bag pass: Off(to deactivate) or Bag pass: On (to activate) is displayed by pressing
buttons + or -, press the MENU ESC button again;❒ a confirmation request message will appear on the display;❒ by pressing the + or - buttons select (Yes) (to confirm the activation/
deactivation) or (No) (to cancel);❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly, a message confirming theselection will be displayed and you will return to the menu screen or
hold the button down to return to the standard screen withoutstoring.

Alfawiki.nl
34

Daytime running lights (DRL)
With this function is possible to turn the daytime running lights on andoff.
Proceed as follows to activate or deactivate this function:❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly to display a submenu;❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly, the display will flash "On" or"Off" depending on the previous setting;❒ press the + or - button to select;❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly to go back to the submenu
screen or hold the button down to go back to the main menu screen
without storing;❒ hold the MENU ESC button down again to go back to the standard
screen or to the main menu according to the position in the menu.

Courtesy lights (Activation/
deactivation of “Greeting lights”)(for versions/markets, where provided)
With this function it is possible to turn on the side lights, the number
plate lights and the ceiling lights for approximately 25 seconds when
the doors or boot are opened using the remote control, with thefollowing exceptions:❒ interruption after 5 seconds from when the door closes❒ interruption after locking using the remote control❒ interruption after a lock or other action using the remote control
Proceed as follows to switch the function on and off:
❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly, the display will flash "On" or"Off" depending on the previous setting;❒ press the + or - button to select;❒ press the MENU ESC button briefly to return to the menu screen or
hold the button down to return to the standard screen withoutstoring.
Menu exit
This is the last function that closes the cycle of settings listed in themenu screen.
Briefly press MENU ESC to go back to the standard screen without
saving. Press the - button to return to the first menu option.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
35

TRIP COMPUTERGETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSVALUES DISPLAYEDGENERAL INFORMATIONThe Trip computer is used to display information on car operation
when the key is turned to MAR.
This function allows you to define two separate trips called “Trip A”
and “Trip B” for monitoring the car's "complete journey" in areciprocally independent manner.
Both functions are resettable (reset - start of a new journey).
“Trip A” is used to display the figures relating to:❒ Range❒ Distance travelled❒ Average fuel consumption❒ Instant fuel consumption❒ Average speed❒ Trip time (driving time).
“Trip B” may be used to display the figures relating to:❒ Distance travelled B❒ Average consumption B❒ Average speed B❒ Trip time B (driving time).
The “Trip B” function may be disabled (see “Activating Trip B”).
“Range” and “Instant consumption" parameters cannot be reset.

Range
This indicates the indicative distance that may be travelled with the fuelin the tank, assuming that driving conditions do not change.
The display will show the reading '-----' when the following events takeplace:❒ range value lower than 50 km (or 30 mi)❒ car parked with engine running for a long period.
IMPORTANT The range can be affected by several factors: driving style(see “Driving style” in the “Starting and driving” section), type ofroute (motorway, towns and cities, mountain roads, etc.), conditions ofuse (load, tyre pressures, etc.). Trip planning must therefore take theabove into account.
Distance covered
Shows the distance covered since the start of the new journey.
Average consumption
Shows the approximate average fuel consumption since the start of the
new journey.
Instantaneous consumption
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is constantly updated.
The display will show “- - - -” if the car is parked with the engine
running.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
36

Average speed
This shows the average car speed as a function of the overall time
elapsed since the start of the new journey.
Trip time
The time elapsed since the start of a new journey.
Indications on display
Each time a value is displayed, the following information is shown:❒ animated icon in the upper part fig. 9;❒ the word “Trip” (or “Trip A” or “Trip B”) (B);❒ the name, value and unit of measurement of the selected parameter(e.g. “Range 1500 km”) (C).
After a few seconds the name and value of the selected parameter are
replaced by an icon fig. 10.

The icons relating to the various parameters are the following:❒"Range";❒"Average consumption A” (if Trip A is active, or “B” if Trip B is
active);❒"Distance" (if Trip A is active, or “B” if Trip B is
active);❒"Instantaneous consumption";❒"Average speed A” (if Trip A is active, or “B” if Trip B is
active);❒"Trip time" (if Trip A is active, or “B” if Trip B is active);

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 9Alfawiki.nl
A0J1223

fig. 10

A0J0033

37

TRIP button 0.00
GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYThe TRIP 0.00 button is located on the right hand stalk fig. 11. With
the ignition key turned to MAR-ON, this button allows you to view thepreviously described values and also set them to zero to begin a
new mission:❒ short press: display various values;❒ long press: values reset and start of a new mission.
New mission

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYThis begins after a reset:❒ “manual” resetting by the user, by pressing the relevant button;❒ “automatic” resetting, when the “trip distance” reaches 99999.9 km
or when the “Travel time” reaches 999:59 (999 hours and 59
minutes);❒ after disconnection/reconnection of the battery.

IMPORTANT The reset operation when “Trip A” details are being
displayed only resets the information associated with this function.
IMPORTANT The reset operation when “Trip B” details are being
displayed resets only the information associated with this function.
Start of journey procedure
With the ignition key at MAR-ON, reset by pressing the TRIP 0.00
button and holding it down for more than 2 seconds.
Trip Exit
The Trip function ends automatically once all the values have been
displayed. You can exit manually by holding the MENU ESC button
down for more than 1 second.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 1138

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0077

SYMBOLS

ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM

Some car components have coloured labels whose symbols indicate
precautions to be observed when using this component. Under thebonnet there is also a label that summarises all the symbols.

To further protect your car from theft, it has been fitted with an engine
immobilising system. It is automatically activated when the ignition
key is removed.
Each key contains an electronic device which modulates the signal
emitted during ignition by an antenna built into the ignition device. The
modulated signal, which changes each time the engine is started, isthe “password”, by means of which the control unit recognises the key
and enables to start the engine.
OPERATION
Each time the car is started by turning the ignition key to MAR, theAlfa Romeo CODE system control unit sends an acknowledgement
code to the engine management control unit to deactivate the inhibitor.
The code is sent only if the Alfa Romeo CODE system control unit hasrecognised the code transmitted from the key.
Each time the ignition key is turned to STOP, the Alfa Romeo CODE
system deactivates the functions of the engine management control
unit. If, during starting, the code is not correctly recognised, thewarning light switches on in the instrument panel.
In this case, turn the key to STOP and then to MAR; if it is still locked,
try again with the other keys that come with the vehicle. If you arestill unable to start the engine contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
39

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETY

Activation of warning light while driving❒ If thewarning light switches on, this means that the system isrunning a self-diagnosis (for example due to a voltage drop).
❒ If thewarning light remains on, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
The electronic components inside the key may be damaged
if the key is subjected to strong shocks.

THE KEYS
CODE CARD(for versions/markets, where provided)
The CODE card fig. 12 is provided with the keys and bears thefollowing:❒ A - electronic code;❒ B - mechanical code.
Keep the codes in a safe place, not in the car.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
40

fig. 12

A0J0212KEY WITHOUT REMOTE CONTROLThe metal insert A fig. 13 operates:❒ the ignition switch;❒ the door lock.
KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL(for versions/markets, where provided)

Press button B fig. 14 only with the key away from yourbody, especially your eyes and from objects which could
get damaged (e.g. your clothes). Do not leave the key
unattended to avoid the button being accidentally pressed while it isbeing handled, e.g. by a child.

SAFETY

Unlocking the doors and the tailgate

The metal insert A fig. 14 operates:❒ the ignition switch;❒ the door lock.
Press button B to open/close the metal insert.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

Briefly press button : for unlocking of doors and luggage
compartment, timed switching-on of internal roof lights and double
flashing of direction indicators (for versions/markets, where provided).
The doors are unlocked automatically if the fuel cut-off systemintervenes.
Once the doors are locked, if one or more doors or the boot are notclosed correctly, the LED and direction indicators start flashing quickly.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 13

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0211

fig. 14

A0J007241

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

Locking the doors and the tailgate

Opening the luggage compartment

Briefly press button : for locking of doors and luggage
compartment, with switching-off of roof light and single flashing of
direction indicators (for versions/markets, where provided).
If one or more doors are open, the doors will not be locked. This isindicated by a rapid flashing of the direction indicators (forversions/markets, where provided). If the luggage compartment is
open, the doors will, however, be locked.
When a speed of over 20 km/h is reached, the doors areautomatically locked if this specific function has been set (only on
versions with multifunction reconfigurable display).
When the doors are locked, LED A fig. 15 switches on for a few
seconds after which it starts to flash (deterrent function).
When the doors are locked from inside the car (by pressing the
button) the LED will remain on constantly.

Press thebutton to open the luggage compartment remotely. The
direction indicators will flash twice to indicate that the boot has been
opened.
REQUESTING ADDITIONAL REMOTE
CONTROLS
The system can recognise up to 8 remote controls. If you need torequest a new remote control, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services,taking the CODE Card (for versions/markets, where provided), an
identity document and documents proving ownership of the car withyou.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 1542

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0027

REPLACING THE BATTERY IN THE KEY
WITH REMOTE CONTROLSAFE LOCK DEVICE(for versions/markets, where provided)

Proceed as follows:❒ press button A fig. 16 and move the metal insert B to opening
position; turn screw C to using a fine bit screwdriver;❒ remove battery compartment D and replace battery E respecting thepolarity; reinsert compartment D in the key and secure it by turning
screw C to .

This safety device inhibits the operation of the interior door handles
and the door locking/unlocking button.
We recommend that you activate this device each time you park thecar.
Activating the device
The device is enabled on all the doors by pressing the button on the
key twice quickly.
The direction indicators flash 3 times and LED A fig. 17 flashes toindicate that the device has been activated. The device does not switch
on if one or more doors are not properly shut.

Used batteries are harmful to the environment. They must
be disposed of as specified by law in special containers
or taken to Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, which willtake care of their disposal.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 16

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0073

fig. 17

A0J002743

Deactivating the device
GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

The device deactivates automatically when:❒ the key insert is turned to opening position in the driver side door;❒ the button is pressed on the remote control;❒ the ignition key is turned to MAR.

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
44

Once the safe lock device is engaged it is impossible toopen the doors from inside the car. Before engaging
the device, check that there is no one left on board. If
the remote control battery is flat, the device can only be
deactivated by using the metal insert in one of the door locks.

The main functions that can be activated with the keys (with or without remote control) are the following:
Type of key

Unlocking thedoors

Locking thedoors from theoutsideSafe Lockactivation (*)

Unlocking the
tailgate

Lowering
windows (*)

Raising
windows (*)

Key without
remote control/
Key with remotecontrol

Anticlockwise key
turn (driver side)

Clockwise key turn(driver side)

-

-

-

-

Brief press of
buttonBrief press of
buttonDouble press of
buttonLong press (morethan 2 seconds) ofLong press (morethan 2 seconds) of

Key with remotecontrol
Flashing direction
indicators (onlywith key withremote control)

Brief press of
buttonbuttonbuttonGETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

2 flashes

1 flash3 flashes

2 flashes

2 flashes

1 flashIN AN EMERGENCY

Switching off

Switching on constantly for about 3
seconds, followed
by deterrence LED
flashing

Double flash, followed by deterrence flashing

Deterrence
flashing

Switching off

Deterrence
flashing

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

IMPORTANT Window opening operation is a consequence of a door unlocking control; window closing operation is a consequence of a door
locking control.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

Deterrent LED(*)For versions/markets, where provided.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
45

ALARM
GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXSWITCHING ON THE ALARM(for versions/markets, where provided)

ALARM ACTIVATION
The alarm activates in the following cases:❒ wrongful opening of a door/bonnet/luggage compartment(perimeter protection);❒ wrongful operation of the ignition switch (key turned to MAR);❒ cutting of the battery cables;❒ movement inside the passenger compartment (volumetric protection);❒ anomalous lifting/tilting of the car (for versions/markets, where
provided).
Operation of the alarm is indicated by an acoustic and visual signal(flashing of the direction indicators for several seconds). The alarm
activation modes may vary according to the market. There is a
maximum number of acoustic/visual cycles. When this is reached thesystem returns to normal operation.
IMPORTANT The engine locking function is guaranteed by the Alfa
Romeo CODE, which is automatically activated when the ignition key
is extracted from the ignition switch.
IMPORTANT The alarm is adapted to meet requirements in various
countries.

With the doors and bonnet closed and the ignition key either turned to
STOP or removed, direct the key with the remote control towards thecar, then press and release the button. Except for specific markets,
the system emits a visual and acoustic signal and enables door locking.
A self-diagnosis stage precedes the switching on of the alarm: in theevent of faults, the system will generate a further acoustic and/or
visual signal through the LED on the dashboard.
If after the alarm is switched on, a second acoustic signal is emitted
and/or a visual signal via the LED on the dashboard, wait about
4 seconds and switch off the alarm by pressing the button, checkthat the doors, bonnet and luggage compartment are closed correctly
and then reactivate the system by pressing the button.
If the alarm emits an acoustic signal even when the doors, bonnet andboot are correctly closed, a fault has occurred in system operation:in this case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
ALARM SELF-ACTIVATION(for versions/markets, where provided)
If the alarm has not been activated using the remote control, once
about 30 seconds have elapsed from when the ignition key was turned
to STOP and a door or the tailgate was last opened and then closed,
the alarm activates automatically.
This is indicated by the LED on the button A fig. 18 lighting up
intermittently and the indications of activation described previously.
To deactivate the alarm, press the button on the remote control.
The alarm also activates when the doors are closed by turning themetal insert of the key in the driver side door latch. If the systemself-activates, the doors are not locked.

Alfawiki.nl
46

SWITCHING OFF THE ALARM

VOLUMETRIC/ANTI-LIFT PROTECTION

Press the button. The following operations are performed (excluding
specific markets):❒ the direction indicators flash briefly twice;❒ there are two brief acoustic signals;❒ unlocking of the doors.

To guarantee the correct operation of the protection, close the side
windows and any sun roof completely (for versions/markets, where
provided).
To disable the function, press button A fig. 18 before activating thealarm. When the function is disabled, this is indicated by the LED on
the button flashing for several seconds.
Any disabling of the volumetric/anti-lift protection must be repeatedeach time the instrument panel is switched off.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

DISABLING THE ALARM

STARTING AND
DRIVING

IMPORTANT The alarm does not switch off when the central opening is
activated using the metal insert in the key.

To permanently disable the alarm (e.g. during a lengthy period of car
inactivity), lock the car by turning the metal insert of the key withremote control in the lock.
IMPORTANT If the batteries of the key with the remote control run out
or there is a fault with the system, the alarm can be switched off byinserting the key in the ignition switch and turning it to MAR.

SAFETYIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl

fig. 18

A0J0226

47

IGNITION DEVICEGETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

The key can be turned to three different positions fig. 19:❒ STOP: engine off, key can be removed, steering column locked.
Some electrical devices (e.g. car radio, central door locking system,
alarm, etc.) are enabled;❒ MAR: driving position. All electrical devices are enabled;❒ AVV: engine start-up.
The ignition switch is fitted with a safety system that requires theignition key to be turned back to STOP if the engine does not start,
before the starting operation can be repeated.
If the ignition switch is tampered with (e.g.: attempted
theft), have it checked over by Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services before driving again.

Always remove the key when you leave the car toprevent someone from accidentally operating thecontrols. Remember to engage the handbrake. Engage
1st gear if the car is parked uphill or reverse if the car is parked
downhill. Never leave children unattended in the car.

STEERING LOCKEngagement
When the key is at STOP, remove the key and turn the steering wheel
until it locks.
Disengagement
Move the steering wheel slightly and turn the ignition key to MAR.

IN AN EMERGENCY

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any after-market
operation involving steering system or steering column
modifications (e.g.: installation of anti-theft device)that could badly affect performance and safety, invalidate thewarranty and also result in non-compliance of the car with
type-approval requirements.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

Never remove the key while the car is moving. The
steering wheel will lock as soon as it is turned. This
holds true for cars being towed as well.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 1948

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0031SEATS

Lengthwise adjustment
Lift the lever A fig. 20 and push the seat forwards or backwards: indriving position your arms should rest on the rim of the steering
wheel.

FRONT SEATSGETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

All adjustments must be made with the car stationary.
After releasing the adjustment lever, always check thatthe seat is locked on the guides by trying to move itback and forth. If the seat is not locked into place,it may unexpectedly slide and cause the driver to lose control of
the car.

Height adjustment(for versions/markets, where provided)

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

Move lever B fig. 20 up or down until the desired height is achieved.
IMPORTANT Carry out the adjustment whilst seated in the driver's seat.

IN AN EMERGENCY

Backrest angle adjustment
Turn knob C fig. 20 until the desired position is reached.
For maximum safety, keep the back of your seat
upright, lean back into it and make sure the seat belt
fits closely across your chest and pelvis.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 20

Alfawiki.nl
A0J007849

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

Lumbar adjustment(for versions/markets, where provided)

Seat heating(for versions/markets, where provided)

Turn knob D fig. 20 until the desired position is reached.

With the key turned to MAR-ON, press buttons A or B fig. 21 to switch
the function on/off.
When the function is activated, the LED on the buttons switch on.

Backrest folding
SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGTo access the rear seats, pull handle E upwards fig. 20: the backrest
will fold and the seat will slide forwards when you push the backrest.
Moving the backrest backwards will return the seat to its initial
position.
Always check that the seat is firmly locked on theguides, trying to push it forwards and backwards.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
50

fig. 21

A0J0253

SPORTS CONFIGURATION FRONTSEATS(for versions/markets, where provided)

If the backrest encounters an obstacle when moving back (e.g. theknees of the passenger in the back seat), the seat will stop, move
forwards by a few centimetres and then stop in this position.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

Lengthwise adjustment
Lift the lever A fig. 22 and push the seat forwards or backwards: indriving position your arms should rest on the rim of the steering wheel.

SAFETY

Backrest angle adjustment
Turn knob B fig. 22 until the desired position is reached.
Backrest folding
To access the rear seats, pull handle C upwards (located behind thebackrest) fig. 22. Then release the lever and, pushing on the backrest,
slide the seat forward.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

REAR SEATOn versions with sports configuration front seats, the rear seat isavailable with an integral or split seat and is only 2-seater.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

EASY ENTRY
This function allows easy access to the rear seats.
To access the rear seats, raise handle E and move the seat’s backrest
forwards: the seat moves forwards automatically.
Bringing the backrest back to its normal position will move the seatback to its initial position.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl

fig. 22

A0J0163

51

HEAD RESTRAINTSGETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYFRONTHead restraints are adjustable in height and they lock automaticallyinto the desired position:❒ upwards adjustment: raise the head restraint until it clicks into place;❒ downwards adjustment: press button A fig. 23 and lower the headrestraint.

The head restraints are equipped with an “Anti-Whiplash” device,
which reduces the distance between head and head restraint in theevent of a rear impact, thus mitigating the “whiplash” effect.
The head restraint may move when the backrest is pressed by theoccupant's torso or hand: this behaviour is caused by the system andshould not be considered a malfunction.

Head restraints must be adjusted so that the head,rather than the neck, rests on them. Only in this case
can they protect your head correctly.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY“Anti-Whiplash” device

To remove the head restraints:❒ raise the head restraints to their maximum height;❒ press buttons A and B fig. 23, then remove the head restraints bypulling them upwards.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 23

52

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0130REARSTEERING WHEEL

Two height-adjustable head restraints are provided for the back seats(to adjust the height see the previous paragraph).
On some versions a head restraint is also provided for the central seat.
To remove the head restraints:❒ raise the head restraints to their maximum height;❒ press buttons A fig. 24, then remove the head restraints by pullingthem upwards.

It can be adjusted axially and vertically.
To adjust, release A fig. 25 by pushing it forwards (position 1) andadjust the steering wheel. Then lock lever A by pulling it towards
the steering wheel (position 2).
All adjustments must be carried out only with thevehicle stationary and engine off.

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any after-market
operation involving steering system or steering column
modifications (e.g. installation of anti-theft device)that could badly affect performance and safety, invalidate thewarranty and also result in the car not meeting type-approvalrequirements.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 24

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0083

fig. 25

A0J0034

53

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CARREAR VIEW MIRRORSElectrochromic interior mirror(for versions/markets, where provided)

INTERNAL MIRROR

Some versions feature an electrochromic mirror fig. 27 with an
ON/OFF switch to activate/deactivate the electrochromic function.
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror is automatically set for
daytime use.

Operate lever A fig. 26 to adjust the mirror into two different positions:normal or anti-glare.
SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 26

54

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0108

fig. 27

A0J0336

DOOR MIRRORSElectric mirror folding(for versions/markets, where provided)

As the driver's door mirror is curved, it may slightly
alter the perception of distance.

To fold back the mirrors press C fig. 28. Press the button again torestore the mirrors to the driving position.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

Mirror manual folding

Mirror adjustment
The mirrors can only be adjusted/folded with the ignition in the MAR
position.
Choose the desired mirror using device A fig. 28:❒ device in position 1: left mirror selected❒ device in position 2: right mirror selected.
To adjust the selected mirror, press B button in the four directions
shown by the arrows.

If necessary, fold the mirrors by moving them from position 1 toposition 2 fig. 29.

SAFETY

IMPORTANT When driving the mirrors must always be in position 1.
STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYIMPORTANT Once adjustment is complete, rotate device A to position
0 to prevent accidental movements.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 28

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0022

fig. 29

A0J0035

55

CLIMATIC COMFORTGETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
fig. 30

A0J0036

DIFFUSERSTECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

1. Fixed upper diffuser – 2. Adjustable centre vents – 3. Fixed side vents – 4. Adjustable side vents – 5. Lower diffusers for front seats – 6. Lower
diffusers for rear seats

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
56

CLIMATE CONTROL/HEATINGSYSTEM

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CARCONTROLSSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

fig. 31

A0J0074

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
57

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

A - Air temperature adjustment knob
❒ blue section = cold air❒ red section = hot air
B - Fan activation/adjustment knob
❒ 0 = fan off❒ 1-2-3 = fan speed❒4= maximum fan speed
C - Air distribution knob
❒ air flow towards driver/passenger body;❒
air flow towards driver/passenger body and footwell;❒
air flow towards front and rear footwell;❒
air flow towards footwell and windscreen;❒
air flow towards windscreen❒4= maximum fan speed

D - Air recirculation on/off button
E - Climate control on/off button (only versions with manual climate
control)F - Heated rear window on/off button;

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
58

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
VENTILATIONPASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING
For rapid heating, proceed as follows:❒ turn knob A to the red section;❒ turn knob C to the desired symbol;❒ turn knob B to desired speed.

Proceed as follows to adjust the ventilation:❒ turn knob A to blue section;❒ press button D to disable internal air recirculation (LED on button
off);❒ turn knob C to ;❒ turn knob B to desired speed.

Rapid heating

CLIMATE CONTROL (cooling) (onlypresent on versions with manual
climate control)
To cool, proceed as follows:❒ turn knob A to blue section;❒ press button D to enable internal air recirculation (LED on buttonon);❒ turn knob C to ;❒ press button E to turn the climate control system on and turn knob B
to at least 1 (1st speed); for faster action, turn knob B to 4 (maximum
fan speed).

For rapid heating, proceed as follows:❒ turn knob A to the red section;❒ press button D to activate internal air recirculation;❒ turn knob C to ;❒ turn knob B to 4
(maximum fan speed).
Then use the controls to maintain the desired comfort conditions andpress button D to turn internal air recirculation off (LED on buttonoff) and to prevent misting.
IMPORTANT When the engine is cold, it takes a few minutes to obtainrapid heating.

Adjusting cooling❒ turn knob A to the right to increase the temperature;❒ press button D to turn internal air recirculation off (circular LED
around the button off);❒ turn knob B to reduce the fan speed.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
59

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSFRONT WINDOW FASTDEMISTING/DEFROSTING(WINDSCREEN AND SIDE WINDOWS)
The climate control system is very useful for making demisting faster.
Adjust the controls as described previously and switch on the climate
control system by pressing button E.
Proceed as follows:❒ turn knob A to the red section;❒ turn knob B to 4
(maximum fan speed);❒ turn knob C to;
❒ press button D to disable internal air recirculation (LED on button
off).
After demisting/defrosting, operate the controls to restore the required
comfort conditions.
Window demisting
The climate control system is very useful in preventing the windows
from misting up in the event of high levels of humidity.
In the event of considerable outside moisture and/or rain and/or
considerable differences in temperature inside and outside thepassenger compartment, proceed as follows to demist the windows:❒ turn knob A to the red section;❒ press button D to disable internal air recirculation (LED on button
off);❒ turn knob C towith the possibility of moving it to position if
demisting does not occur;❒ turn knob B to the 2nd speed.

HEATED REAR WINDOWDEMISTING/DEFROSTING
Press button F ( ) to turn the function on/off. The function is
automatically deactivated after 20 minutes.
For versions/markets where provided, press the
button to activate
demisting/defrosting of door mirrors, heated windscreen (forversions/markets, where provided) and heated nozzles (for versions/markets, where provided).
IMPORTANT Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated rearwindow over the heating filaments, to avoid damage that might cause
them to stop working properly.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
60

INTERNAL AIR RECIRCULATIONSYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Press button D (). It is advisable to switch air recirculation onwhile standing in traffic or in tunnels to prevent the introduction ofpolluted air.
Do not use the function for a long time, particularly if there are many
passengers on board, to prevent the windows from misting up.

In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at least once amonth for about 10 minutes.
Have the system checked by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services before
summer.

IMPORTANT Internal air recirculation makes it possible to reach therequired heating or cooling conditions more quickly depending on themode selected. Do not use the air recirculation function on rainy/colddays as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows
misting.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
61

AUTOMATIC DUAL ZONEGETTING TO CLIMATE CONTROLKNOW YOUR CAR(for versions/markets, where provided)

CONTROLSSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

62

fig. 32

A0J0037

G - heated rear window on/off button;
A - driver/passenger side MONO function activation button(alignment of set temperatures);
H - AUTO function activation button (automatic operation) andpassenger side temperature adjustment knob;
B - climate control compressor on/off button;
I - passenger side air distribution selection button;
C - internal air recirculation on/off button;
L - fan speed increase/decrease;D - display;E - climate control off button;
M - driver side air distribution selection button;
F - MAX-DEF function activation button (rapid defrosting/demisting of
N - AUTO function (automatic operation) activation button and driver
front windows);
Alfawiki.nlside temperature adjustment knob.

DESCRIPTION
The automatic dual zone climate control system regulates the airtemperatures/distribution in the passenger compartment in two areas:
driver side and passenger side.
The system keeps the passenger compartment comfort level constantand compensates for any variations in external conditions, including
solar radiation detected by a specific sensor.
The automatically controlled parameters and functions are:❒ air temperature at the driver's/front passenger side vents;❒ air distribution at the driver's/front passenger side vents;❒ fan speed (continuous variation of the air flow);❒ compressor engagement (for cooling/dehumidifying the air);❒ air recirculation.
All these functions can be adjusted manually by operating the systemand selecting one or more functions and modifying their parameters.
Automatic control of the manually changed functions will besuspended: the system will only override the settings for safety reasons.
Manual selections always have higher priority than automatic settings
and are stored until the AUTO button is pressed, except for cases inwhich the system intervenes for safety reasons.
You can adjust one function manually without affecting the automatic
control of the others. The amount of air introduced into the passenger
compartment is not affected by vehicle speed; it is electronicallycontrolled by a fan.

The air temperature is always automatically controlled according to thetemperature set on the display (except for when the system is off or incertain conditions when the compressor is not running).
The system allows the following to be set or adjusted manually:❒ driver's/passenger side air temperature;❒ fan speed (continuous variation);❒ air distribution to 7 positions (driver/passenger);❒ compressor enabling;❒ rapid defrosting/demisting function;❒ air recirculation;❒ heated rear window;❒ system deactivation.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
63

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXSWITCHING ON THE CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM

ADJUSTING THE AIR TEMPERATURE

The climate control system can be switched on in different ways: werecommend pressing one of the AUTO buttons and turning the knobs
to set the desired temperatures.
It is possible to select different temperatures for the driver andpassenger, with a maximum difference of 7°C.
In this way the system operates completely automatically to adjust thetemperature, quantity and distribution of the air introduced into thepassenger compartment. It also manages the air recirculation systemand the activation of the air conditioning compressor.
During fully automatic operation the only manual intervention is thepossible activation of the following functions:❒ MONO, to align the air temperature and distribution set on thepassenger side with that on the driver side;❒
air recirculation (keeping the function always either on oroff);❒
to speed up demisting/defrosting of front windows, rearwindow and door mirrors;❒
to demist/defrost heated rear window and door mirrors.
During automatic operation, you can change the set temperatures, air
distribution and fan speed at any time by using the relevant buttons
or knobs: the system will automatically change the settings to adjust to
the new requirements.
In this way the climate control system will continue to automaticallymanage all functions except for those that have been manually
adjusted. The fan speed is the same in all the zones of the passenger
compartment.

Turn knob N or H to the right or left to adjust the air temperature: knob
N for the front left area, knob H for the front right area of thepassenger compartment. The set temperatures are shown on thedisplay.
Press the MONO button to align the air temperature of the two areas:
to set the same temperature, turn knob N.
To return to separate management of air temperature and distribution
between the two areas, turn knob N or H or press the MONO button
again (when the LED on the button is on).
Turn the knobs fully right or left to engage HI (maximum heating) or LO(maximum cooling) respectively. To deactivate these functions, turnthe temperature knob to the desired temperature.

Alfawiki.nl
64

SETTING THE AIR DISTRIBUTION
By pressing the buttons ( / / ), it is possible to set one of the 7possible air distributions manually:
Air flow to the windscreen and front side window diffusers todemist/defrost them.
Air flow at central and side dashboard vents to ventilate the chestand the face during the hot season.
Air flow to the front and rear footwell diffusers. This air
distribution setting heats the passenger compartment mostquickly, giving a prompt sensation of warmth.
Air flow distributed between footwell vents (hotter air) andcentral and side dashboard vents (cooler air). This
distribution setting is useful in spring and autumn on sunnydays.
Air flow distributed between footwell diffusers andwindscreen and front side window defrosting/demisting
diffusers. This distribution setting allows the passenger
compartment to warm up efficiently and prevents thewindows from misting up.
Air flow distribution between windscreen demisting/defrosting diffusers and side and central dashboard vents.
This allows air to be sent to the windscreen in conditionsof strong sunlight.
Air flow distribution to all vents on the car.
In FULL AUTO mode, the climate control system automatically manages
air distribution (the LEDs on buttons I and M are off). When set
manually, the air distribution is shown by the LEDs on the selectedbuttons.

In combined function mode, functions are enabled together with thosealready set when the relevant button is pressed. If a button whosefunction is already active is pressed, the operation is cancelled and thecorresponding LED switches off. To restore automatic control of the
air distribution after a manual selection, press the AUTO button.
When the driver selects air distribution to the windscreen, the air
distribution on the passenger side is also aligned to the windscreen.
The passenger can still select a different air distribution mode bypressing the corresponding buttons.
ADJUSTING THE FAN SPEED
Press button L to increase/decrease the fan speed. The speed is shownby the lit bars on the display:❒ maximum fan speed = all bars lit;
❒ minimum fan speed = one bar lit.
The fan can only be excluded if the climate control compressor has
been switched off by pressing button B.
IMPORTANT To restore automatic control of the fan speed after amanual adjustment, press the AUTO button.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
65

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSAUTO BUTTONSAIR RECIRCULATION

Press the AUTO buttons to make the system automatically adjust thequantity and distribution of the air introduced into the respective areasof the passenger compartment; all previous manual settings will becancelled (this condition is indicated by the text FULL AUTO on
the display).
By manually adjusting at least one of the functions automaticallymanaged by the system (air recirculation, air distribution, fan speed or
switching off the air conditioner compressor), the word FULL will
disappear from the display, indicating that the system is no longer
automatically controlling all the functions (the temperature will still becontrolled automatically).

The air recirculation is managed according to the following operating
logics:❒ automatic activation: press one of the AUTO buttons. Activation isindicated by the word AUTO appearing on the display;❒ override on (inside air recirculation always on): indicated by the LED
on button C and thesymbol on the display;❒ override off (air recirculation constantly off, air intake from theoutside): signalled by the LED on button C switching off and by thesymbol in the display disappearing. Forced activation/
deactivation can be selected by pressing button C.

IMPORTANT If the system is no longer able to reach/maintain therequested temperature in the various areas of the passenger
compartment, the set temperature will flash and after approximately 1minute the word AUTO will disappear.
To restore automatic control of the system after one or more manualadjustments, press the AUTO button.

IMPORTANT The activation of recirculation makes it possible to reachthe required passenger compartment heating/cooling conditions faster.
It is, however, inadvisable to use it on rainy/cold days as it would
considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting up inside(especially if the climate control system is off).
When the outside temperature is low, recirculation is forced off (airdrawn in from the outside) to prevent the windows from misting up. In
automatic operation, air recirculation will be managed automaticallyby the system according to external environmental conditions.
When manual recirculation control is set, the word FULL disappears
from the display and AUTO disappears from the icon.

MONO BUTTON
Press the MONO button to align the passenger side air temperature
with that of the driver side. In this way it is also possible to set the
air distribution between the two areas by turning knob N.
This function makes temperature regulation easier when the driver istravelling alone.
To return to separate management of the air temperature anddistribution, turn knob H to set the passenger side temperature or press
the MONO button when the LED on the button is on.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
66

It is advisable not to use the air recirculation function
when the outside temperature is low to prevent thewindows from rapidly misting up.

CLIMATE CONTROL COMPRESSOR
Press button B to activate/deactivate the compressor. The systemremembers that the compressor has been switched off, even after theengine has stopped.
When the compressor is switched off the system deactivates air
recirculation to prevent the windows from misting up. In this case,although the system is capable of maintaining the required
temperature, the word FULL will disappear from the display.
If, however, the system is unable to maintain the requested
temperature, the temperature indications flash and the word AUTO
disappears.
To restore automatic control of compressor engagement, press button B
again or press the AUTO button.
With compressor off:
❒ if the outside temperature is higher than the set one, the system will
not be able to satisfy the request. The temperature value will then
flash on the display for a few seconds and the word AUTO will
disappear;❒ the fan speed can be reset manually.
With the compressor on and the engine running, the fan speed cannot
be lower than one bar on the display.

RAPID WINDOW DEMISTING/
DEFROSTING (MAX-DEF function)
Press button F to activate windscreen and side window demisting/defrosting. The climate control system carries out the following
operations:❒ switches on the air conditioning compressor when climaticconditions are suitable;❒ deactivates air recirculation;❒ sets maximum air temperature (HI) in both zones;❒ sets fan speed according to the engine coolant temperature;❒ directs air flow to windscreen and front side windows diffusers;❒ activates the heated rear window.
IMPORTANT The MAX-DEF function remains on for about 3 minutes
from when the engine coolant reaches the appropriate temperature.
When the function is active the words FULL AUTO disappear from thedisplay. With the function active the only possible manual adjustments
are adjusting the fan speed and turning the heated rear window off.
Pressing buttons B, C, F or AUTO switches off the MAX-DEF function
and restores the settings that were present before the function was
activated.

IMPORTANT With the climate control compressor off, air cannot be
introduced to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower
than the outside temperature; moreover, under certain environmental
conditions, windows could mist rapidly since the air is notdehumidified.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
67

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYHEATED REAR WINDOWDEMISTING/DEFROSTINGTURNING THE CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM OFF

Press thebutton to activate heated rear windscreen demisting/defrosting. This function switches off automatically after about 20
minutes or when the engine is turned off. It is not switched on
automatically the next time the engine is started.
For versions/markets where provided, press the
button to activate
demisting/defrosting of door mirrors, heated windscreen (forversions/markets, where provided) and heated nozzles (for versions/markets, where provided).

Press the OFF button.
With climate control off:
❒ air recirculation is on, thus isolating the passenger compartment
from the outside;❒ the compressor is off;
❒ the fan is off;
❒ the heated rear window can be switched on or off;

IMPORTANT Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated rearwindow over the heating filaments, to avoid damage that might cause
them to stop working properly.

IMPORTANT The climate control system control unit stores thetemperatures set before the system was switched off and restores themwhen any button of the system is pressed (except for button G). If thefunction of the pressed button was not active before switching off, thatfunction will also be activated. If it was active, it will be restored.
To restart the climate control system in fully automatic mode press the
AUTO button.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
68

EXTERIOR LIGHTSADDITIONAL HEATER(only diesel versions)(for versions/markets, where provided)
This allows the passenger compartment to be heated more quickly incold weather conditions. The additional heater turns off automaticallyafter the required comfort conditions are achieved.
Automatic dual zone climate control system(for versions/markets, where provided)

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

The left stalk fig. 33 operates most of the exterior lights. The external
lights can only be switched on when the ignition key is at MAR.
The instrument panel and the various controls on the dashboard will
come on when the external lights are switched on.

SAFETYDAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)“Daytime Running Lights”

The additional heater activates automatically when the ignition key isturned to MAR-ON.
Manual heater and manual climate control
The additional heater activates automatically when knob N is turned tothe end of the red section and the fan is set to at least 1st speed.
IMPORTANT The heater only works if the outside temperature andengine coolant temperature are low. The heater will not activate if thebattery voltage is too low.

LEFT STALKWith the ignition key at MAR and ring nut A fig. 33 turned to , thedaytime running lights switch on. The other lights and interior lighting
stay off.
For daytime running light functionality, see the “Menu Items”
paragraph in this section. If the function is deactivated, no lights are
switched on when ring nut A is turned to .

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl

fig. 33

A0J006369

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSIDE LIGHTS/DIPPED BEAMHEADLIGHTS

Activation

With the ignition key turned to MAR, turn ring nut A fig. 33 to.

The daytime running lights are switched off and the side lights anddipped headlights are switched on. The warning lightswitches
on on the instrument panel.
PARKING LIGHTSSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

These lights can only be switched on with ignition key at STOP or
removed, by moving ring nut A first to position and then to position.
When the parking lights are switched on, the number plate lights andthe front and rear side lights switch on as well (the daytime runninglights (DRLs) remain off however).
The warning lightswitches on on the instrument panel.
When the direction indicator stalk is activated the side for the lights(left or right) can be selected.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL(AUTOLIGHT) (Dusk sensor)(for versions/markets, where provided)

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSThis infrared LED sensor, combined with the rain sensor and located on
the windscreen, detects the variations in outside brightness dependingon the light sensitivity set with the Set-up Menu: the greater thesensitivity, the less external light is required to activate the exterior
lights.

The dusk sensor activates when ring nut A fig. 33 is turned tothis way the side lights and dipped headlights are activatedautomatically according to the external light level.

IMPORTANT The sensor is unable to detect the presence of fog.
Therefore under these circumstances, these lights must be turned on
manually.
When the lights are turned on by the sensor, the fog lights (forversions/markets, where provided) and the rear fog lights may beturned on.
When the lights are automatically switched off, the front and rear fog
lights (if activated) are also switched off. The next time the lights are
switched on automatically, the fog lights must be reactivated manually(if required).
With the sensor active, it is possible to flash the headlights but themain beam headlights cannot be switched on. If you need to turn theselights on, turn ring nut A to position
and turn the dipped
headlights on.
When the lights have been activated automatically and are thenswitched off by the sensor, the dipped beam headlights are switched
off first, followed by the side lights a few seconds later.
If the sensor is activated but is malfunctioning, the side lights anddipped beam headlights are switched on irrespective of the outside
light level and the sensor failure is indicated on the instrument panel
display.
It is also possible to deactivate the sensor and switch on these lights if
necessary.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
70

. In

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS"FOLLOW ME HOME" DEVICE

With ring nut A atpull the stalk towards the steering wheel (stable
position). The warning lightswitches on on the instrument panel.

This device allows you to illuminate the area in front of the car for acertain amount of time.

To turn the lights off, pull the stalk towards the steering wheel (dipped
headlights will stay on). It is not possible to switch on the main beam
headlights in fixed mode if the automatic lighting control system is
active.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

Activation
With the ignition key at STOP or removed, pull stalk A towards thesteering wheel and move it within 2 minutes of the engine switchingoff.
At each single movement of the stalk, the lights will remain on for an
extra 30 seconds up to a maximum of 210 seconds; then the lights are
switched off automatically.
The
warning light on the instrument panel will light up (and thecorresponding message will appear on the display) as long as thefunction is active.
The light comes on when the stalk is first moved and stays on until thefunction is automatically deactivated. Each movement of the stalk
only increases the amount of time the lights stay on.

FLASHING
Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel (unstable position) regardlessof the position of ring nut A. The warning lightswitches on on
the instrument panel.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Bring the stalk into (stable) position:❒ upwards: activates right direction indicator;❒ downwards: activates left direction indicator.
Warning light or will flash in the instrument panel.
The indicators are switched off automatically when the steering wheel
is straightened.

Deactivation
Keep stalk A pulled towards the steering wheel for more than 2seconds.

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE"Lane change" function
If you want to signal that you are changing lane, hold the left stalk in
the unstable position for less than half a second. The direction indicatoron the selected side flashes 3 times and then switches off automatically.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
71

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

EXTERNAL COURTESY LIGHTSWINDOW CLEANING

This function lights up the car and the space in front of it when the
doors are unlocked.

WINDSCREEN WASHER/WIPER

Activation
SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

When the car is parked and the doors are unlocked by pressing the
button on the remote control (or the luggage compartment isunlocked by pressing), the dipped headlights, side lights andnumber plate lights are activated.
The lights remain lit for approximately 25 seconds unless the doors
and boot are locked again with the remote control or the doors or bootare opened and reclosed. In these cases they go out after 5 seconds.
The exterior courtesy lights can be enabled/disabled using the Setup
Menu (see the paragraph “Menu Items” in this chapter).

The right stalk controls windscreen wiper/washer and rear window
wiper/washer operation.
This operates only with the ignition key turned to MAR.
Ring nut A fig. 34 has the following positions:
O windscreen wipers off;intermittent operation (low speed);
AUTO rain sensor activation (for versions/markets, where provided)(the windscreen wipers adapt the operating speed
automatically to suit the intensity of the rain)intermittent operation;
continuous slow operation;
continuous fast operation.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
72

fig. 34

A0J0064

Move the stalk upwards (unstable position) to limit operation to thetime for which the stalk is held in this position. When released, thestalk will return to its default position and the wiper will be
automatically stopped.

RAIN SENSOR(for versions/markets, where provided)
This is an infra-red LED sensor fitted on the car windscreen fig. 35.
It is able to detect the presence of rain and consequently manage
windscreen wiping in accordance with the amount of water on thewindscreen.

Do not use the windscreen wiper to remove layers ofsnow or ice from the windscreen. In such conditions,
the windscreen wiper may be subjected to excessive
stress and the motor protection, which prevents operation for a
few seconds, may intervene. If operation is not restored, evenafter turning the key and restarting the engine, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

SAFETY

Activation
The sensor is activated when ring nut A fig. 34 is turned to “automatic”
position (“AUTO” control): the windscreen wiper stroke frequency isthus adjusted in accordance with the amount of water on thewindscreen.
This frequency can vary from no stroke (no rain - windscreen dry) up
to the 2nd constant speed operation (heavy rain - windscreen wet).

Do not operate the windscreen wiper with the blades
lifted from the windscreen.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY"Smart washing" function
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel (unstable position) to operate
the windscreen washer. Keep the stalk pulled for more than half asecond, with just one movement, to operate windscreen washer/wiper
jet at the same time.
The wiper stops working three strokes after the stalk is released. A
further stroke after approximately 6 seconds completes the cycle.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl

fig. 35

A0J018973

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSThe sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted through the Set-up
menu (see paragraph “Menu Items” in this section).
If the engine is stopped with the lever in “automatic” position, when it
is next started no wiping cycle will take place even if it is raining.
This prevents accidental activation of the rain sensor when the engine
is started (e.g. when the windscreen is being washed by hand or
the wipers are stuck to the windscreen when there is ice).
Carry out any of the following manoeuvres to restore automatic
operation of the system:❒ movement of left stalk from the automatic position to any otherposition and then back to automatic;❒ sensitivity adjustment (by turning ring nut A to increase or decrease).
When the rain sensor is reactivated using any of the manoeuvres
described above, reactivation is indicated by a single stroke of thewindscreen wipers, regardless of the condition of the windscreen.
If the sensitivity is changed whilst the rain sensor is operating, awindscreen wiper stroke is carried out to confirm the change.
In the event of malfunction of the rain sensor whilst it is active, thewindscreen wiper operates intermittently at a speed consistent with thesensitivity setting of the rain sensor, regardless of whether there israin on the glass (sensor failure is indicated on the display).
The sensor continues to operate and it is possible to set the windscreen
wiper to continuous mode (1st or 2nd speed). The failure indication
remains for as long as the sensor is active.

REAR WINDOW WASHER/WIPER(for versions/markets, where provided)
Activation
This operates only with the ignition key turned to MAR.
Turn ring nut B fig. 34 from position O to position to operate therear window wiper as follows:❒ in intermittent mode when the windscreen wiper is not operating;❒ in synchronous mode (at half the speed of the windscreen wiper)
when the windscreen wiper is operating;❒ in continuous mode with reverse gear engaged and the control
active.
With reverse gear engaged and windscreen wiper on, the rearwindow wiper is activated in continuous mode. Pushing the stalktowards the dashboard (unstable position) will activate the rearwindow washer jet.
Keep the stalk pushed for more than half a second to activate the rearwindow wiper as well. Releasing the stalk will activate the smart
washing function, as described for the windscreen wiper.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
74

CRUISE CONTROLTURNING THE DEVICE ON(for versions/markets, where provided)

GENERAL INFORMATIONThis is an electronically controlled driving assistance device whichallows driving at a chosen speed above 30 km/h on long stretches ofdry, straight roads with few variations (e.g. motorways), without
having to depress the accelerator pedal.
The use of this device on extra-urban roads with traffic is not therefore
recommended. Do not use it in town.

Turn ring nut A fig. 36 to ON.
The device cannot be engaged in 1st or reverse gear: it is advisable toengage it in 5th gear or higher.
When travelling downhill with the device engaged, the car may slightly
exceed the stored speed.
When the device is activated, the warning light switches on
together with the relevant message on the display (for versions/markets, where provided).

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

STORING THE CAR SPEED

STARTING AND
DRIVING

Proceed as follows:❒ turn ring nut A fig. 36 to ON and press the accelerator to reach therequired speed.
❒ move the stalk upwards (+) for at least 1 second, then release it: thecar speed is now memorised and you can therefore release theaccelerator.
If needed (when overtaking for instance), you can accelerate simply bypressing the accelerator; when you release the pedal, the car goesback to the speed set previously.

SAFETYIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 36

Alfawiki.nl
A0J006575

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYRESTORING THE MEMORISED SPEEDTURNING THE DEVICE OFF

If the device has been disengaged by pressing the brake or clutch
pedal, the stored speed can be reset as follows:❒ accelerate gradually until a speed approaching the one stored isreached;❒ engage the gear selected at the time that the speed was stored;❒ press the RES button (B fig. 36).

To disengage the device:- turn ring nut A fig. 36 to OFF;or
- switch the engine off;or
- press the brake pedal, the clutch or the accelerator; in this last casethe system is not effectively disengaged but the system gives priority to
the acceleration request. The device still remains active, without theneed to press the RES button to return to the previous conditions once
acceleration is concluded.

INCREASING THE MEMORISED SPEED
STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

Press the accelerator and store the new speed or move the lever
upwards (+).
Each movement of the stalk corresponds to an increase in speed ofabout 1 km/h, while keeping the stalk held upwards will continuously
increase the speed.
REDUCING THE MEMORISED SPEED
Deactivate the device and store the new speed or move the leverdownwards (–) until the new speed is reached. It will then be storedautomatically.
Each movement of the lever corresponds to a slight reduction in speedof about 1 km/h, while keeping the stalk held downwards will
decrease the speed continuously.

Automatic deactivation
The device deactivates automatically in the following cases:❒ if the ABS or VDC systems intervene;❒ with the car speed below the set limit;❒ in the event of system failure.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

If operation is inadequate or the device is faulty, turnring nut A fig. 36 to OFF and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
76

When travelling with the device active, never move thegear lever to neutral.

ROOF LIGHTSFRONT ROOF LIGHT
Switch A fig. 37 switches the roof lights on/off.
A switch positions:❒ central position (position 1): lights C and D switch on/off when the
doors are opened/closed.
❒ pressed to the left (position 0): lights C and D are always switchedoff;❒ pressed to the right (position 2): lights C and D are always switchedon.
Lights switch on/off progressively.

Switch B controls the spot light function.
B switch positions:❒ central position (position 1): lights C and D are always switched off;
❒ pressed to the left (position 0): light C switches on;❒ pressed to the right (position 2): light D switches on.
IMPORTANT Before getting out of the car, make sure that both switches
are in the central position: when the doors are closed the lights willswitch off to avoid draining the battery.
In any case, if the switch is left inadvertently in the permanently on
position, the roof light will turn off automatically 15 minutes after theengine stopping.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGROOF LIGHT TIMING
On certain versions, to facilitate getting in/out of the car at night or in
poorly-lit areas, two timed modes have been provided.

IN AN EMERGENCY

Timing when getting into the car
The roof lights switch on according to the following modes:❒ for about 10 seconds when the doors are unlocked;❒ for about 3 minutes when one of the doors is opened;❒ for about 10 seconds when the doors are closed.
The timed period is interrupted when the ignition key is turned to MAR.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 37

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0066

77

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

Timing when getting out of the car

PUDDLE LIGHTS

After removing the key from the ignition switch, the roof lights switch
on as follows:❒ within 2 minutes of the engine being switched off for a period ofaround 10 seconds;❒ for about 3 minutes when one of the doors is opened;❒ for about 10 seconds when one of the doors is closed.
The timing stops automatically when the doors are locked.

These are located in the doors fig. 39. They switch on when the doors
are opened, regardless of the position of the ignition key.
The lights switch off when the doors are closed.

COURTESY LIGHTS(for versions/markets, where provided)
On some versions, courtesy lights are fitted behind the sun visors.
Press switch A fig. 38 to switch the light on/off.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 38

78

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0067

fig. 39

A0J0176

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOF
LIGHTGLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

This is located on the left side of the luggage compartment fig. 40.
This switches on automatically when the luggage compartment is
opened and switches off when it is closed.
The light switches on/off regardless of the ignition key position.

This light comes on automatically when the glove compartment fig. 41
is opened and switches off when it is closed.
The light switches on/off regardless of the ignition key position.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 40

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0270

fig. 41

A0J0177

79

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYCONTROLS

FOG LIGHTS(for versions/markets, where provided)

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS

Press the fig. 43 button to switch the lights on/off.
With the lights on, warning light in the instrument panel switcheson.

Press switch A fig. 42 to switch on/off the lights.
Warning lights and on the panel are lit up when the lights areon.
The use of hazard lights is governed by the Highway
Code of the country you are in. Comply with legal
requirements.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGREAR FOG LIGHT
Press the fig. 43 button to switch the light on/off.
The rear fog light switches on only when the dipped headlights are
switched on. With the light on, the warning light in the instrument
panel switches on.

Emergency braking
IN AN EMERGENCY

In the event of emergency braking the hazard warning lights are lit up
automatically as well as the and warning lights in the panel.
The lights switch off automatically when emergency braking ceases.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 4280

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0028

fig. 43

A0J0025

CENTRAL LOCKING
Press button A fig. 44 to lock all doors at the same time.
Locking takes place irrespective of the position of the ignition key.
FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM
This intervenes in the case of an impact causing:❒ the interruption of the fuel supply with the engine consequently
cutting out;
❒ the automatic unlocking of the doors;❒ the interior lights being switched on.
The intervention of the system is indicated by a message shown on thedisplay.
Carefully check the car for fuel leaks, for instance in the engine
compartment, under the car or near the tank area.
After a collision, turn the ignition key to STOP to prevent the battery
from running down.

To restore the correct operation of the car, proceed as follows:❒ turn the ignition key to the MAR position;❒ activate the right direction indicator;❒ deactivate the right direction indicator;❒ activate the left direction indicator;❒ deactivate the left direction indicator;❒ activate the right direction indicator;❒ deactivate the right direction indicator;❒ activate the left direction indicator;❒ deactivate the left direction indicator;❒ turn the ignition key to the STOP position.
If, after a collision, you smell fuel or notice leaks fromthe fuel system, do not reactivate the system to avoid
fire risk.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 44

Alfawiki.nl
A0J003081

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYINTERIOR FITTINGSFRONT ARMREST(for versions/markets, where provided)

GLOVE COMPARTMENT

This is located between the front seats. To bring it to its standard use
position, push it downwards.
Press button A fig. 46 to raise the upper part of the armrest and accessthe compartment inside it. Press lever B to incline the armrest
downwards relative to its standard use position.

Operate handle A fig. 45 to open the compartment. When thecompartment is opened, a courtesy light switches on.
The glove compartment features a document holder.
Do not travel with the glove compartment open: it
could injure the passenger in the event of an accident.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 4582

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0060

fig. 46

A0J0194

POWER SOCKETS
These are located on the central tunnel A fig. 47 and on the left side ofthe luggage compartment B fig. 47. They only operate with the ignition
key at MAR-ON.
If you request the smokers' kit, the socket on the central tunnel isreplaced with a cigar lighter (see following paragraph).

IMPORTANT Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W tothe socket. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable adaptors.
CIGAR LIGHTER
This is located on the central tunnel. Press button A fig. 48 to activate
the cigar lighter.
After a few seconds the button automatically returns to its initial
position, and the cigarette lighter is ready for use.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETY

IMPORTANT Always check that the cigar lighter is switched off.
IMPORTANT Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W tothe socket. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable adaptors.
The cigar lighter gets very hot. Handle it carefully andmake sure that children don’t use it: risk of fire
and/or burns.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 47

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0068

fig. 48

A0J0069

83

ASHTRAYGETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

The ashtray is a removable spring-loaded plastic box that can be fitted
into the cup/can holders on the central tunnel fig. 49

EXTINGUISHER(for versions/markets, where provided)
This is located on the right side of the luggage compartment fig. 51.

Do not use the ashtray as a waste paper basket: it
may catch fire in contact with cigarette stubs.

SAFETYSUN VISORSSTARTING AND
DRIVING

These are located at the sides of the interior rear view mirror. They canbe adjusted forwards and sideways.
A courtesy mirror with roof light is fitted on the back of the visors. The
light allows the mirror to be used even in poor visibility conditions.
Lift cover A fig. 50 to access the mirror.

IN AN EMERGENCY
fig. 50

A0J0071

fig. 51

A0J0190

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 49

84

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0070

ELECTRIC SUN ROOF
(for versions/markets, where provided)

The extensively glazed sun roof comprises a moving glass panel and a
sun blind.
The glazed panel, when closed, allows light from the outside to enterand makes it possible to see the outside from the passenger
compartment.
OPERATION
The sun roof can be operated only with the ignition key turned to MAR.
The controls A and B fig. 52 on the trim next to the front courtesy light
operate the sun roof opening/closing functions.
Roof opening

Automatic
If button A is held down, the front glass panel is raised from completely
closed to spoiler position.
If the button is pressed again, the panel will start to slide backwards
until it is completely open.
After the initial opening command, the glass panel can be stopped inintermediate positions by pressing the button again.
ManualIf button A is pressed briefly, the front glass panel moves fromcompletely closed position and stops in the position where the button isreleased. In this case, the panel is opened by pressing the button.
This function makes it possible to place the front panel in intermediate
positions in relation to those produced through automatic opening.

Pressing button A fig. 52 permits two opening modes for the front
glass panel.

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

Do not open the sunroof if there is snow or ice on it: you
may damage it.

IN AN EMERGENCY

The sun roof must stay closed if a transverse roof rack isfitted.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fromthe ignition to avoid the risk of injury to those stillinside the car due to accidental operation of thesunroof. Improper use of the roof can be dangerous. Before
operation, always check that no-one is at risk of being injured by
the moving sun roof or by objects getting caught and draggedby it.
fig. 52

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CARTECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
A0J032985

Closing the sun roof
GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

Pressing button B fig. 52 permits two closing modes for the front glass
panel.
Automatic
With roof completely open, hold down button B: the front glass panel
will move to spoiler position.
If the button is pressed again, the panel will start to slide forward until
it is completely closed.
After the initial opening command, the glass panel can be stopped inintermediate positions by pressing the button again.
ManualIf button B is pressed briefly, the front glass panel moves from thecompletely open position and stops in the position where the button isreleased. In this case, the panel is closed by pressing the button.
This function makes it possible to place the front glass panel inintermediate positions in relation to those produced through automatic
closing.

ROOF CLOSING SAFETY DEVICES(anti-pinch function)
The anti-pinch system, which conforms to Directive 2000/4/EC, isactive during the horizontal and vertical closing stage of the panel
after an obstacle is encountered (e.g. finger, hand):❒ during horizontal closing movement it is active for theentire travel and, after an obstacle is encountered at the front of theglass panel, it reverses the movement;❒ during vertical closing movement it is active and, after an
obstacle is encountered at the back of the glass panel, it reverses
the movement until the spoiler position is reached.
The possibility of pinching from the inside of the passenger
compartment in the side areas of the panel is avoided through the
adoption of side guards that prevent access to risk areas.
IMPORTANT The anti-pinch system is deactivated by pressing button B
continuously.

SUN BLIND
The brightness in the passenger compartment can be adjusted by using
a sun blind.
Opening the blind: press button A fig. 53 to release the blind andthen grip handle B in order to slide it backwards.
Closing the blind: grip handle B fig. 53 and slide the blindforwards, making sure that it clicks into place.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
86

fig. 53

A0J0157

INITIALISATION PROCEDURE

MAINTENANCE/EMERGENCY

After the battery has been disconnected or a fuse has blown, theoperation of the sun roof must be initialised again.
Proceed as follows:❒ press button B fig. 52 until the roof is completely closed. Release thebutton;❒ press B button and keep it pressed for at least 10 seconds and/or
until the glass panel clicks forwards. Release the button at this point;❒ within 5 seconds of the previous operation, press button B and holdit down: the front glass panel will complete a full opening andclosing cycle. Only release the button at the end of this cycle.

In the event of emergency or maintenance, the roof can be moved
manually when there is no power supply (opening/closing of the front
glass panel) by carrying out the following operations:❒ remove the protective cap A fig. 54 located on the internal lining,
between the two sun blinds;❒ take the Allen key B supplied, which is located in the on-board
documentation container or in the tool container in the luggage
compartment;❒ introduce the key into housing C and turn it clockwise to open theroof or anticlockwise to close the roof.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl

fig. 54

A0J0328

87

DOORSGETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

Door locking/unlocking from the inside

DOOR CENTRAL LOCKING/UNLOCKING
Locking from the outside

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

With the doors closed, press the button on the key or turn the metal
insert (located inside the key) in the driver side door lock.
The LED above fig. 55 button A switches on to indicate that the doors
have been locked.
The door locking function is operated:❒ with all the doors closed;❒ with all the doors closed and the luggage compartment open:
Door unlocking from the outside
Press the button on the key or turn the metal insert (located inside
the key) in the driver side door lock.

Press fig. 55 button A. The button has an LED that indicates whether
the car doors are locked or unlocked.
LED on: doors locked. Press button
once again to centrally unlock
all doors. The LED will switch off.
LED off: doors unlocked. Press the button
again to centrally lock all
doors. The doors will be locked only if all the doors are properly
shut.
Once the doors have been locked via the remote control or the key
pawl, it will no longer be possible to unlock them by pressing button.
IMPORTANT With the central locking system on, pull the door lever of
one of the doors to open that door only (the LED on button A will
stay on if it is the passenger door).
In the absence of electrical power supply (blown fuse, battery
disconnected, etc.) it is still possible to lock the doors manually.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 55

88

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0030PASSENGER SIDE EMERGENCY FRONTDOOR LOCKING DEVICE
The front passenger side door has a device to lock it when there is no
current.
To lock it, fit the metal insert of the ignition key in the housing A fig. 56
and move it upwards.

IMPORTANT If the battery is disconnected or the protection fuse blows,
the door opening/closing mechanism must be initialised as follows:❒ close all the doors;❒ press button on the key or button
for locking/unlocking thedoors on the instrument panel;❒ press button on the key or button
for locking/unlocking thedoors on the instrument panel.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 56

Alfawiki.nl
A0J030989

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

ELECTRIC WINDOWS

Passenger side door

These are equipped with an automatic function to raise and lower thedriver side front window.

The passenger side door is equipped with a button that controls the
opening/closing of the passenger side window.

CONTROLS

Continuous automatic operation(for versions/markets, where provided)

Driver side door fig. 57❒ A - Front left window opening/closing;❒ B - Front right window opening/closing;Push the buttons to open/close the desired window.
When one of the two buttons is pressed briefly, the window moves instages; if the button is held down, “continuous automatic operation”
is activated both for closing and opening.
If the control button is pressed again, the window will stop in thedesired position. If the button is held down for several seconds, thewindow raises or lowers automatically (only with ignition key in MAR
position).

This is activated by pressing one of the two buttons for longer than halfa second. The window will stop when it is fully opened or closed, orwhen the button is pressed again:❒ Driver side: raising/lowering.
❒ Passenger side: only lowering.
❒ Where anti-crush device is present: raising/lowering driver side andpassenger side.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 57

90

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0023

Anti-crush safety device(for versions/markets, where provided)
The car’s anti-crush function is active as the windows are being raised.
This safety system detects the presence of an obstacle during thewindow closing travel and intervenes by stopping and reversing thewindow travel, depending on its position. This device is also useful
if the windows are activated accidentally by children on board the car.
The anti-crush safety function is active both during the manual andthe automatic operation of the window. When the anti-crush system is
activated, the window travel is immediately interrupted and thenreversed. The window cannot be operated in any way during this time.
IMPORTANT If the anti-crush protection intervenes 5 consecutive times
within a minute or is faulty, the automatic closing operation of thewindow is inhibited, only allowing it in steps of half a second with the
button released for the subsequent manoeuvre.
In order to restore the correct operation of the system, the relevant
window must be lowered.

IMPORTANT With the anti-crush system, when the button on the
remote control is pressed for longer than 2 seconds the windows will
open, whilst if the button is pressed for longer than 2 seconds
the windows will close.
The system conforms to the 2000/4/EC standard concerning
the safety of passengers leaning out of the passenger
compartment.
Incorrect use of the electric windows may be
dangerous. Before and during operation, always checkthat no passenger is at risk of being injured directlyby the moving window or by objects getting caught in or
dragged by the window. When leaving the car, always remove
the key from the ignition to prevent accidental operation of theelectric windows from being a hazard for those still on board.

IMPORTANT With ignition key at STOP or removed, the electricwindows remain active for about 3 minutes and are deactivated whena door is opened.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
91

Electric window system initialisation
GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYThe system must be re-initialised after disconnecting the battery or if
the relevant protection fuse is blown.
Initialisation procedure:❒ fully close the window to initialise with manual operation;❒ after the window has reached the upper end of travel, hold down
the closing control for at least 1 second.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
92

For versions/markets where provided, after a break in power supply
for the control units (battery replaced or disconnected or protective
fuses for the electric window control units replaced), the automatic
operation of the windows must be restored.

The restoration procedure must be performed as described below withthe doors closed:❒ completely open the driver's door window, holding the operating
button down for at least three seconds after the (lower) end of travel
position;❒ completely raise the driver side window and hold the button down
for at least 3 seconds once the (upper) end of travel position has
been reached;❒ proceed in the same way as described in points 1 and 2 for thepassenger side door;❒ make sure that the initialisation is correct by checking that thewindows work automatically.

IMPORTANT With the central locking on, pulling the internal opening
lever for one of the doors switches the locking off for all the doors.
In the absence of electrical power supply (blown fuse, battery
disconnected, etc.) it is still possible to lock the doors manually. In thiscase, the automatic lowering function of the windows is not available.
Press the window towards the inside of the car (see fig. 58) to open
or close the door with the window raised to ease the passage of thewindow into the moulding.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 58

Alfawiki.nl
A0J017093

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT

Emergency opening from the inside

The luggage compartment is unlocked electrically and cannot be
unlocked when the car is in motion.

Proceed as follows:❒ remove the rear head restraints and completely fold back the seats(see the paragraph “Expanding the luggage compartment”);❒ push lever A fig. 60.

OPENINGSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

When unlocked, the boot can be opened from outside the car bypressing the electric logo fig. 59 until a click is heard which indicatesunlocking or by pressing the
button on the remote control.
The direction indicators will flash twice and an internal light will switch
on when the luggage compartment is opened: the light switches off
automatically when the luggage compartment is closed. The lightswitches off automatically after a few minutes if the luggage
compartment is left open.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 59

94

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0058

fig. 60

A0J0178

CLOSING
Lower the tailgate, pressing near the lock until you hear it click into
place.
Pull the tab A fig. 61 and lower the tailgate, pressing next to the lockuntil it clicks.
IMPORTANT Before closing the luggage compartment make sure thatyou have the keys since the luggage compartment is automaticallylocked.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
INITIALISATIONIMPORTANT If the battery is disconnected or the protection fuse blows,
the luggage compartment opening/closing mechanism must be
initialised as follows:❒ close all the doors and the luggage compartment;❒ Press the button on the remote control;❒ Press the button on the remote control.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 61

Alfawiki.nl
A0J007995

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

EXTENDING THE LUGGAGECOMPARTMENT

Folding the seats

The luggage compartment can be partially (1/3 or 2/3) or totallyextended by splitting the rear seat. See the descriptions in “Removing
the parcel shelf” and “Folding back the seats” paragraphs for how
to expand the luggage compartment.

Proceed as follows:❒ raise the head restraints to the maximum height, press both the
buttons A fig. 64 to the side of the two supports, then remove thehead restraints by sliding them upwards;

Removing the parcel shelf
Proceed as follows:❒ free the ends of the two parcel shelf B mounting links A fig. 62 byremoving the eyelets C from the mounting pins;❒ free the pins A fig. 63 on the outside of the shelf from the housings B
in the side mountings, then remove the parcel shelf;❒ after removal, the parcel shelf can be loaded sideways into theluggage compartment or placed between the front seat backrests
and the folded-back rear seat cushions (with the luggage
compartment completely expanded).
fig. 63

A0J0081

fig. 64

A0J0083

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 6296

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0080❒ move the seat belts to the side, making sure that they are correctly
extended and not twisted;❒ lift the backrest retaining levers A fig. 65 and fold the desired
cushion forwards (a red band indicates that lever A is raised).

BONNET

Repositioning the rear seat
Move the seat belts to the side making sure that they are correctly
extended and not twisted.
Raise the previously folded backrest until you hear the click of thelocking mechanism, visually checking that the red band on lever A fig.
65 has disappeared. The red band indicates that the backrest is notsecured.
Finally, reposition the head restraints, inserting them into theirhousings.

OPENINGGETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

Proceed as follows:❒ pull lever A fig. 66 in the direction indicated by the arrow;❒ pull lever B in the direction indicated by the arrow;❒ lift the bonnet and, at the same time, release bonnet stay C fig. 67
from its locking device. Then, insert the end in housing D, making
sure that the stay is engaged in the smallest opening of the retaining
clip.

SAFETY

IMPORTANT Before lifting up the bonnet make sure that the windscreen
wipers are in the rest position and not operational.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 65

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0082

fig. 66

A0J008597

CLOSING
GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

Proceed as follows:❒ hold the bonnet up with one hand and with the other remove rod C
fig. 67 from housing D and fit it back into its locking device;

SAFETY❒ lower the bonnet to about 20 cm from the engine compartment, thenlet it fall and check, by trying to raise it, that it is completely closed
and not only attached in safety position. If it is not perfectly closed,
open the bonnet and repeat the procedure. Do not simply press it.
IMPORTANT Always check that the bonnet is closed correctly to avoid
it opening while the car is travelling.
The following plate is applied inside the engine compartment fig. 68:
For safety reasons, the bonnet must always beproperly closed while driving. Make sure that thebonnet is perfectly closed and that the lock is engaged.
If you discover during travel that the lock is not fully engaged,
stop immediately and close the bonnet in the correct manner.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

Perform these operations only when the car is
stationary.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

The bonnet may drop suddenly if the supporting rod is
not positioned correctly.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 6798

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0086

fig. 68

A0J1520

ROOF RACK/SKI RACK
To fit the roof rack/ski rack, raise the dedicated tabs A fig. 69 using
the screwdriver provided to access the fixing housings B.
Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo includes a dedicated roof rack/ski rack forthis car.

IMPORTANT Take the greatest possible care in following the
instructions on the bar kit to the letter.
After travelling for a short distance, check that the
fixing screws for the attachments are correctly
tightened.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETY
Never exceed the maximum permitted loads (see chapter"Technical specifications").
STARTING AND
DRIVING
Evenly distribute the load and take into account, whendriving, the increased effect of side wind on the car.

IN AN EMERGENCY
Fully comply with the regulations in force concerning
maximum clearance.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 69

Alfawiki.nl
A0J005999

HEADLIGHTSGETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

LIGHT BEAM DIRECTION
The correct orientation of the headlights is important for the driver's
comfort and safety as well as for all other road users. This is also
covered by a specific rule of the highway code.
The headlights must be correctly aligned to ensure the best visibility
conditions for yourself and others when driving with lights on. To check
and, if necessary, adjust, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENT CORRECTOR

Position 0 one or two people in the front seats.
Position 1 4 people.
Position 2 4 people + load in luggage compartment.
Position 3 driver + maximum permitted load stowed in the luggage

compartment.

IMPORTANT Check the alignment every time that the load carriedchanges.
IMPORTANT If the car is equipped with Bixenon headlights, theheadlight alignment is controlled electronically, as a consequence theand buttons are not present.

This device works with the ignition key in the MAR position and thedipped headlights on.
Headlight alignment adjustment
To adjust, press the and fig. 70 fig. 71 buttons. The adjustment
position is shown on the display.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 70100

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0026

fig. 71 - Versions with Start&Stop system

A0J0277

ABS SYSTEM

FOG LIGHT ALIGNMENT(for versions/markets, where provided)
To check and, if necessary, adjust, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHTS ABROAD
The dipped headlights are aligned to comply with the regulations of
the country of purchase. When travelling in countries with opposite
driving direction, to avoid dazzling the drivers on the other side of theroad, you need to cover areas of the headlight according to the
Highway code of the country you are travelling in.

The car is fitted with an ABS braking system, which prevents the wheels
from locking when braking, makes the most of road grip and gives
the best control when performing emergency braking under difficultroad conditions.
The EBD system (Electronic Braking Force Distribution) completes thesystem allowing the brake force to be distributed between the front andrear wheels.
IMPORTANT To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system,a bedding-in period of about 500 km is needed: during this period
it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGSYSTEM INTERVENTION
It can be detected because the brake pedal pulsates slightly and thesystem gets noisier: it means that the car speed should be alteredto suit the type of road surface.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
101

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

MECHANICAL BRAKE ASSIST(emergency braking assistance)(for versions/markets, where provided)
This system, which cannot be deactivated, recognises emergency
braking conditions (according to the brake pedal operation speed) andprovides an additional hydraulic braking pressure to support thatprovided by the driver. This allows faster and more powerful operationof the braking system.
IMPORTANT When the Mechanical Brake Assist intervenes, noises may
be heard from the system. This is normal. In any case, while braking
keep the brake pedal firmly depressed.

traction.

If the ABS system intervenes, this indicates that thetraction of the tyres on the road is nearing its limit.
Slow down to a speed compatible with the available

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
102

The ABS gets the most from the available grip, but it
cannot improve it; you should therefore take every
care when driving on slippery surfaces and not takeunnecessary risks.

When the ABS cuts in and you feel the brake pedal
pulsating, do not remove your foot, but keep the pedal
pushed down; in doing so you, will stop in the
shortest distance possible under the road conditions at the time.

VDC SYSTEM (Vehicle Dynamics
Control)

HILL HOLDER SYSTEM

This is an electronic system that controls car stability in the event of tyre
grip loss, helping maintain directional control.
The system is capable of recognising potentially dangerous situationsin terms of the stability and intervenes automatically on the brakes in adifferentiated manner for the four wheels in order to provide astabilising torque.
The VDC, in turn, includes the following systems:❒ Hill Holder❒ ASR❒ Brake Assist
❒ MSR
❒ CBC
❒ “ELECTRONIC Q2” (“E-Q2”)❒ DST
SYSTEM ACTIVATIONThe VDC system switches on automatically each time the engine isstarted and cannot be switched off.

This system is an integral part of the VDC system and it is provided tofacilitate starting on slopes.
It is activated automatically in the following instances:❒ uphill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradient higher than 5%,
engine running, brake pedal pressed and gearbox in neutral orgear (other than reverse) engaged;❒ downhill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradient higher than
5%, engine running, brake pedal pressed and reverse gear
engaged.
When setting off the VDC system control unit maintains the braking
pressure at the wheels until the engine torque required for departure isreached or for approximately 2 seconds, allowing your right foot tobe moved easily from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
If the vehicle has not departed after this time, the system will deactivate
automatically by gradually releasing the brake force. A sound may
be heard during this stage: this indicates that the vehicle is about
to move off.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT The Hill Holder system is not a handbrake. Do not leave
the vehicle without having engaged the handbrake, switched off theengine and engaged a gear.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

SYSTEM INTERVENTION
This is indicated by the flashing of the warning light on the
instrument panel, to indicate that the car is in critical stability and grip
conditions.

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYTECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
103

ASR SYSTEM (AntiSlip Regulation)
GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

It is an integral part of the VDC system. It automatically operates in theevent of one or both drive wheels slipping, loss of grip on wet roads(aquaplaning) and acceleration on slippery, snowy or icy roads, etc…
Depending on the slipping conditions, two different control systems
are activated:❒ if the slipping involves both drive wheels, the ASR intervenes
reducing the power transmitted by the engine;❒ if the slipping only involves one of the drive wheels, the ASR
intervenes automatically braking the wheel that is slipping.
For the correct operation of the VDC and ASR systems,
the tyres must be the same make and type on allwheels, in perfect condition and, above all, of the type,make and size specified.

less grip.

If the spare wheel is used, the VDC system keeps
operating. Always remember that the space-saver
wheel, being smaller than the original wheel, provides

The performance of the VDC and ASR systems must notencourage the driver to take unnecessary risks. Drivingstyle must always be adapted to road conditions,visibility and traffic. The driver is always responsible for roadsafety.

BRAKE ASSIST(assistance during emergency braking)The system, which cannot be turned off, recognises emergency braking(on the basis of the brake pedal operating speed) and speeds up the
response of the braking system. The Brake Assist device is deactivated
if there is a VDC system failure.
MSR SYSTEM(Motor Schleppmoment Regelung)This system is an integral part of the ABS, that intervenes, if there issudden downshifting, restoring torque to the engine, thereby
preventing excessive drive at the drive wheels which, especially in poor
grip conditions, could lead to a loss in stability of the car.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
104

CBC SYSTEM (Cornering Brake
Control)

DST SYSTEM (Dynamic Steering
Torque)This function improves the distribution of the braking pressure at thefour wheels (to fully exploit the grip available on the ground) whenbraking on bends if the ABS intervenes. This improves stopping
distances and above all vehicle stability when cornering.

This function integrates Dual Pinion active steering into the operation of
the VDC. For particular manoeuvres, the VDC controls the steering toactuate a steering torque and assist the driver in the best possible way.
The system operates the brakes and steering in a coordinated manner
to increase the suspension and safety level of the car as a whole.
The steering provides additional torque on the steering wheel.

“ELECTRONIC Q2” SYSTEM (“E-Q2”)
The “Electronic Q2” system uses the braking system to create an effectsimilar to a limited slip differential.
The front braking system, in cornering acceleration conditions, acts
appropriately on the inner wheel, increasing the drive of the outerwheel (with more load) and sharing the torque between the front drive
wheels dynamically and continuously according to the driving
conditions and the road surface.
The system, combined with MacPherson front suspension, allows
particularly effective and sports driving.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
105

“Alfa DNA” SYSTEM (CarGETTING TO dynamic control system)

KNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

This device allows, using lever A fig. 72 (on the central tunnel), three
car response modes to be selected according to driving style and roadconditions:❒ d = Dynamic (sports driving mode);❒ n = Natural (mode for driving in normal conditions);❒ a = All Weather (mode for driving in poor grip conditions, such as
rain and snow).
The device also acts on the dynamic car control systems (engine,steering, VDC system, instrument panel).
DRIVING MODESIN AN EMERGENCY

Lever A is monostable type. In other words, it always remains in acentral position.

The selected driving mode is indicated by the corresponding LED
coming on in the panel and by an indication on the reconfigurable
multifunction display, as illustrated below:❒ Dynamic mode fig. 73 (display image available for versions/markets, where provided)❒ All Weather Mode fig. 74“Natural” mode
When “Natural” mode is selected, no messages or symbols are shownon the display.
VDC and ASR: intervention thresholds aimed at comfort in normal
conditions of use.
Steering wheel
tuning: functions aimed at providing comfort in normal conditions ofuse.
DST: standard braking control coordinated with ABS/VDC. Standard
control over lateral acceleration. Oversteer compensation: aslight pulse on the steering wheel encourages the driver to carryout the most appropriate manoeuvre.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 72

106

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0090

fig. 73

A0J0227

Steering wheel tuning: sports mode function.

Engine: standard response

ENGAGEMENT/DISENGAGEMENT OF“Dynamic” MODE
Engagement
Move the lever A fig. 72 upwards (next to the letter “d”) and hold inthis position for 0.5 seconds until the corresponding LED lights up
or the word “Dynamic” appears on the display (see fig. 75).
Upon release, lever A returns to the central position.
VDC and ASR:

intervention thresholds for more enjoyable, sportier driving,guaranteeing stability in case control of the car is lost. Improves
traction whilst accelerating on bends.

DST: standard braking control coordinated with ABS/VDC. Standard

control over lateral acceleration. Compensates oversteering
depending on the VDC/ASR intervention thresholds: a slightmovement on the steering wheel encourages the driver to carryout the most appropriate manoeuvre.
Engine: prompter response + Overboost to maximise torque (forversions/markets, where provided).
In the 1.4 Turbo MultiAir versions, selecting “Dynamic” operating
mode activates the turbocharger supercharging function (overboost):
depending on the accelerator pedal position and for a limited time, theengine management control unit allows the system to generate
maximum pressure levels inside the turbocharger and the engine
torque can reach higher values than usual.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 74

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0290

fig. 75

A0J1510107

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CARThis function is particularly useful whenever maximum performance isrequired for a short time (e.g. when overtaking).
IMPORTANT During acceleration, when the “Dynamic” function is used
the steering may shudder, which is typical of a sports setting.
Disengagement

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGTo deactivate “Dynamic” mode and return to “Natural”, repeat thesame movement of the lever within the same times. In this case, the LED
corresponding to “Natural” mode will light up and the words “Naturalon” will appear on the reconfigurable multifunction display (see fig.
76).
ENGAGEMENT/DISENGAGEMENT OF“All Weather” MODE

IN AN EMERGENCY

Engagement

VDC and ASR: intervention thresholds for top safety and car control

even in the event of critical road conditions (e.g. incase of rain, snow, etc.).
Steering wheel tuning: maximum comfort.
DST: higher braking control coordinated with ABS/VDC. Standard

control over lateral acceleration. Compensates oversteering
depending on the VDC/ASR intervention thresholds: a slightmovement on the steering wheel encourages the driver to carryout the most appropriate manoeuvre.
Engine: standard response
Disengagement
To deactivate “All Weather” mode and return to “Natural”, carry out
the same procedure described for “Dynamic” mode, but move lever A
fig. 72 to “a”.

Move lever A fig. 72 downwards (to the letter “a”) and hold in thisposition for 0.5 seconds until the corresponding LED lights up or theword “All Weather” appears on the display (see fig. 77).

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 76

108

Alfawiki.nl
A0J1059

fig. 77

A0J1511

IMPORTANT❒ It is not possible to switch directly from “Dynamic” mode to “All
Weather” mode and vice versa. You must always first go backto “Natural” mode and then select the other mode.
❒ If “All Weather” or “Natural ”mode was active when the engine wasstopped, the next time it is started the mode that was selected isreactivated.
❒ In the event of system failure or a fault with lever A fig. 72, nodriving modes can be selected. The display will show a warning
message.

START&STOP SYSTEM(for versions/markets, where provided)

The Start&Stop system automatically stops the engine each time the car
is stationary and starts it again when the driver wants to move off.
In this way, the efficiency of the car is increased, by reducing
consumption, emissions of harmful gases and noise pollution.
The system is active every time the engine is started.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYOPERATING MODES
Engine stopping mode
With the car stopped, the engine stops with gearbox in neutral andclutch pedal released.
Note Note: the engine can only be stopped automatically after
exceeding about 10 km/h, to prevent the engine from being
repeatedly stopped when driving at walking pace.
The fig. 78 symbol appears on the display when the engine stops.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl

fig. 78

A0J0279109

Restarting the engine
GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGENGINE STOPPING FAILURE
CONDITIONS

Press the clutch pedal to restart the engine.
SYSTEM MANUAL ACTIVATION/
DEACTIVATION
To activate/deactivate the system manually, press the fig. 79 buttonon the trim next to the steering wheel.
When the system is deactivated, the warning light on the instrument
panel switches on. For versions/markets where provided, a message
and symbol are also displayed in the event of system activation/
deactivation.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

When the system is operating, due to comfort, emission control andsafety reasons, the engine does not stop in some conditions, among
which:❒ engine still cold;❒ especially cold outside temperature;❒ battery not sufficiently charged;❒ heated rear window activated;❒ windscreen wipers working at maximum speed;❒ particulate filter regeneration (DPF) in progress (diesel engines only);❒ driver's door not shut;❒ driver's seat belt not fastened;❒ reverse gear engaged (for example, for parking manoeuvres);❒ for versions equipped with dual zone automatic climate control (forversions/markets, where provided), if an adequate level of thermal
comfort has not been reached or with MAX-DEF function activation;❒ during the first period of use, to initialise the system.
If the climate comfort is to be favoured, the Start&Stop
system can be deactivated, for a continuous operation of
the climate control system.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 79

110

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0247ENGINE RESTARTING CONDITIONSSAFETY FUNCTIONS

Due to comfort, emission control and safety reasons, the engine canrestart automatically without any action by the driver, under special
conditions, such as:❒ battery not sufficiently charged;❒ windscreen wipers working at maximum speed;❒ reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. if the brake pedal is pressed
repeatedly);❒ car moving (e.g. when driving on roads with a gradient);❒ engine stopping by Start&Stop system for over 3 minutes;❒ for versions equipped with dual zone automatic climate control
system (for versions/markets, where provided), if an adequate levelof thermal comfort has not been reached or MAX-DEF function
activation.
With gear engaged, automatic engine restarting is possible only by
fully depressing the clutch pedal. The driver is informed by thedisplaying of a message on the display and - for versions/markets,
where provided - by the flashing of the symbol .

When the engine is stopped by the Start&Stop system, if the driver
releases his/her seat belt and opens the driver's or passenger's door,
the engine can be restarted only using the ignition key.
The driver is informed by a buzzer and by the flashing of the symbolon the display; on some versions, a message is displayed as well.
"ENERGY SAVING" FUNCTION(for versions/markets, where provided)If, following automatic engine restarting, the driver does not carry out
any action on the car for over 3 minutes, the Start&Stop system stops
the engine once and for all, to prevent fuel consumption. In thesecases, the engine can be restarted only using the ignition key.
NOTE In any case, it is possible to keep the engine running bydeactivating the Start&Stop system.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

IRREGULAR OPERATION

Notes
If the clutch is not pressed, about 3 minutes after the engine stops, theengine can be restarted only using the ignition key.
In cases when the engine stops and this is not desired, due for example
to the clutch pedal being released sharply with a gear engaged, if theStart&Stop system is activated, the engine can be restarted by fully
depressing the clutch pedal or by placing the gear lever in neutral.

In the event of malfunction, the Start&Stop system is deactivated.
The driver is informed of the fault by the warning light switchingon in the instrument panel and, for versions/markets where provided,a message and symbol on the display.
In this case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
111

CAR INACTIVITY

JUMP STARTING
When jump starting, never connect the negative lead (–) of theauxiliary battery to the negative pole A fig. 81 of the car battery, butrather to an engine/gearbox earth point.

SAFETYIn the event of car inactivity (or if the battery is replaced), special
attention must be paid to the disconnection of the battery power
supply.
The procedure must be carried out as follows: press button A fig. 80 todetach connector B from battery status monitoring sensor C (this islocated on the negative pole of the battery itself).

STARTING AND
DRIVING

In case of battery replacement, always contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services. Replace the battery with
one of the same type (HEAVY DUTY) and with the same
specifications.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

IN AN EMERGENCYIMPORTANT After turning the ignition key to STOP, wait at least 1
minute before disconnecting the electrical supply to the battery.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 80112

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0379

fig. 81

A0J0388

Before opening the bonnet, make sure the engine is off andthe ignition key is in the STOP position. Follow theindications on the plate underneath the bonnet fig. 82. It isadvisable to extract the key when there are other people in the car.
Leave the car only after having removed the ignition key or having
turned it to STOP. During refuelling, make sure that the engine is off
and that the ignition key is in the STOP position.

DYNAMIC SUSPENSION (active
shock absorber system)(for versions/markets, where provided)

This system interacts with the “Alfa DNA” system (see paragraph “AlfaDNA”).
The “Alfa DNA” system lever allows you to choose three different
driving settings depending on the route type and on the road surface:❒ d = Dynamic (sports driving mode);❒ n = Natural (mode for driving in normal conditions);❒ a = All Weather (mode for driving in poor grip conditions, such as
rain and snow).
In “Natural” and “All Weather” operating mode, the active shock
absorbers adjust the car suspension to suit the route type andthe driving stresses, thus considerably improving driving comfort inparticular on rough terrain.
The "Dynamic" operating mode produces a sports driving setting
characterised by more responsive acceleration and greater effort on
the steering wheel to give a sporty feeling. The shock absorberdamping action is also adjusted and divided, to guarantee higher
precision and reactivity of the car, while maintaining a good comfort
level.
The car is more precise when entering bends and quicker in changing
direction.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 82

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0341

113

EOBD SYSTEM (European On
GETTING TO Board Diagnosis)

KNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY(for versions/markets, where provided)

The aim of the EOBD system (European On Board Diagnosis) is to:❒ monitor the system efficiency;❒ indicate an increase in emissions;❒ indicate the need to replace damaged components.
The car also has a diagnostic connector that can be interfaced withappropriate tools, which makes it possible to read the error codes
stored in the electronic control units together with a series of specificparameters for engine operation and diagnosis. This check can also be
carried out by the traffic police.

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
This only operates with the key turned to MAR-ON and the engine
started. Power steering allows the force required at the steering wheel
to be adapted to driving conditions.
The different power assistance modes can be selected via the "d,n,a"positions of the “Alfa DNA System” lever (see “Alfa DNA System”
paragraph).

IMPORTANT After eliminating a fault, to check the system completely,
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services are obliged to run tests and, if
necessary, road tests which may also call for a long journey.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
114

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any after-market
operation involving steering system or steering column
modifications (e.g.: installation of anti-theft device)that could badly affect performance and safety, invalidate thewarranty and also result in non-compliance of the car with
type-approval requirements.

Before performing any maintenance operations,always turn off the engine and remove the key fromthe ignition to lock the steering column, especiallywhen the car’s wheels are not touching the ground.

WIRING FOR RADIO SYSTEMPREPARATION TO INSTALL A
PORTABLE NAVIGATION SYSTEM(for versions/markets, where provided)

If no radio was requested with the car, it is provided with a dual
storage compartment in the dashboard fig. 83.
The radio setup system is composed of:❒ car radio power supply cables, front and rear speakers and an
aerial;❒ radio housing;❒ aerial on car roof.
The radio must be fitted in the special compartment A fig. 83, which
can be removed by pressing the two retaining tabs in the compartment
itself; the power supply cables are located in this area.

of the car.

(for versions/markets, where provided)

On cars equipped with the Blue&Me™ system, there may be (onrequest) the setup for installing the Blue&Me™ TomTom® portablenavigation system, which is available from Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo.
Install the portable navigation system in the housing illustrated in
fig. 84.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

When connecting a car radio to the radio wiringcontact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to prevent any
faults from occurring that might compromise the safety

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 83

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0087

fig. 84

A0J0107

115

INSTALLING ELECTRICAL/GETTING TO ELECTRONIC DEVICESKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE
PHONESElectrical and electronic devices installed after buying the car in thecontext of after-sales service must carry the following label: fig. 85
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. authorises the installation of transceiverdevices on condition that such installations are carried out in aworkmanlike fashion, following the manufacturer’s instructions, at a
specialised centre.
IMPORTANT Traffic police may not allow the car on the road if devices
have been installed which modify the features of the car. This may
also cause invalidation of warranty in relation to faults caused by thechange either directly or indirectly related to it.
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. shall not be liable for damage causedby the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended
by Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. and/or not installed in compliancewith the provided instructions.

Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios,amateur radio, etc.) cannot be used inside the car unless a separate
aerial is mounted externally.
IMPORTANT The use of similar devices inside the passenger
compartment (without separate aerial) produces radio-frequency
electromagnetic fields which, amplified by the resonance effects inside
the passenger compartment, may cause electrical systems equipping
the car to malfunction. This could compromise safety in addition to
constituting a potential hazard for the passengers.
In addition, transmission and reception of these devices may beaffected by the shielding effect of the car body.
As far as the use of EC-approved mobile phones is concerned (GSM,
GPRS, UMTS), follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile
phone manufacturer.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 85

116

Alfawiki.nl
DISPOSITIVI-ELETTRONICIPARKING SENSORS

If there are several obstacles the closest one is indicated.

(for versions/markets, where provided)

ACOUSTIC SIGNAL

The parking sensors are located in the car's rear bumper fig. 86 andtheir function is to inform the driver, through an intermittent acoustic
signal, about the presence of obstacles behind the car.
ACTIVATIONThe sensors are activated by engaging reverse gear. As the obstacle
behind the vehicle gets closer to the car, the acoustic signal becomes
more frequent.
INDICATIONS ON DISPLAY(for versions/markets, where provided)
When the sensor is activated, the "Reconfigurable multifunction
display" (for versions/markets, where provided) shows the screen
illustrated in fig. 87.
Obstacle presence and distance information is therefore provided bothby the buzzer and the instrument panel display.

When reverse gear is engaged an acoustic signal is automatically
activated if there is an obstacle within the range of operation.
The acoustic signal:❒ increases as the distance between the car and the obstacle
decreases;❒ becomes continuous when the distance between the car and the
obstacle is less than 30 cm and stops immediately if the distanceincreases;❒ remains constant if the distance remains unchanged; if this situation
concerns the side sensors, the buzzer will stop after about 3 seconds
to avoid, for example, warning indications in the event of
manoeuvres along walls.
IMPORTANT The volume of the acoustic signal can be adjusted throughthe option "Warning volume" of the "Set-Up menu".

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 86

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0088

fig. 87

A0J0370117

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

Detection distances❒ Central operating range: 140 cm❒ Side operating range: 60 cm
If several obstacles are detected by the sensors, only the nearest one isconsidered.

Parking manoeuvres however are always the driver’s
responsibility. When carrying out such manoeuvres,always ensure that the manoeuvring area is free of
people (particularly children) and animals. The parking sensor isdesigned to assist drivers, who must still never allow theirattention to lapse during potentially dangerous manoeuvres evenif performed at low speed.

OPERATION WITH TRAILER
Parking sensor operation is deactivated automatically when the trailer
electric cable plug is fitted into the car tow hook socket. The sensors
are automatically enabled again when the trailer's cable plug isremoved.
The sensor must be free of mud, dirt, snow or ice in orderfor the system to work. Be careful not to scratch or damage
the sensors while cleaning them. Avoid using dry, roughor hard cloths. The sensors should be washed using clean water withthe addition of car shampoo if necessary. When using special washingequipment such as high pressure jets or steam cleaning, clean thesensors very quickly keeping the jet more than 10 cm away.
When repainting the bumpers or touching up paint in
the sensor area, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services only. Incorrect paint application could affectthe operation of the parking sensors.

GENERAL WARNINGS
During parking manoeuvres, pay the utmost attention to any obstacles
that could be located above or below the sensors.
Objects located near the rear of the car are not detected under certain
circumstances and could therefore cause damage to the car or bedamaged.
The following conditions may influence the performance of the parking
sensor system:❒ reduced sensor sensitivity and a reduction in the parking assistancesystem performance could be due to the presence on the surface ofthe sensor of: ice, snow, mud, thick paint❒ the sensors may detect a non-existent obstacle (echo interference)
due to mechanical interference, for example when washing thecar, in rain (strong wind), hail;❒ The signals sent by the sensors can also be altered by the presenceof ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems or pneumatic
drills) near the vehicle.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl118❒ sensor performance can also be influenced by the position of thesensors. For example by a change in the ride setting (caused by
the wear of the shock absorbers, suspension), overloading thevehicle and carrying out specific tuning operations that require thevehicle to be lowered;❒ The detection of obstacles at the top part of the car may not be
guaranteed because the system detects obstacles that could cause an
impact with the car in the bottom part.

TPMS (Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System)(for versions/markets, where provided)

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

The car may be fitted with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS),
which informs the driver of the tyre inflation status via the "Checktyre pressure" and "Low tyre pressure" messages on the display.
This system comprises a radio frequency transmitter fitted to eachwheel (on the wheel rim inside the tyre), which is able to send
information on the tyre inflation pressure of each wheel to the control
unit.

SAFETY

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THE TPMS
The fault indications are not stored and will therefore not be displayed
after the engine has been switched off and then on again.
If the fault conditions persist, the control unit will send the relative
indications to the instrument panel only after the car has been inmotion for a short time.
The presence of the TPMS does not permit the driver toneglect regular checks of the tyre pressure, including
for the spare wheel.

Tyre pressure must be checked with tyres rested andcold. Should it become necessary for whatever reason
to check pressure with warm tyres, do not reducepressure even though it is higher than the prescribed value, but
repeat the check when tyres are cold.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
119

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

Should one or more wheels be fitted without sensors,
the system will no longer be available and a warning
message will be shown on the display, until 4 wheels
with sensors are fitted again.

The TPMS cannot warn of sudden decreases in tyrepressure (for example when a tyre bursts). In this case,stop the car, braking with caution and avoiding
abrupt steering.

Replacing standard tyres with winter tyres and viceversa requires TPMS system adjustment that must only
be performed by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

Variations in outside temperature may cause tyrepressures to vary. The TPMS may temporarily indicate
insufficient pressure. In this case, check the tyrepressure when cold and, if necessary, restore the inflation values.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
120

When a tyre is removed, it is advisable to replace therubber valve seal as well: contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services. Tyre and rim fitting/removal
operations require specific precautions; to avoid damaging or
fitting the sensors incorrectly, tyre and wheel fitting/removal
operations should only be carried out by specialised staff.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.

Intense radio-frequency interference may prevent thecorrect operation of the TPMS. This condition will be
indicated by a message on the display. The message
will disappear automatically as soon as the interference ceases toaffect the system.

In order to use the system properly, refer to the following table when you have to change wheels/tyres:
Presence of sensor

Failure indication

Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services intervention

–

–

YES

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services

Wheel change with space-saver
wheel

NO

YES

Repair the damaged wheel

Wheel change with winter tyres

NO

YES

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services

Wheel change with winter tyres

YES

NO

–

Wheel change with others of adifferent size (*)

YES

NO

–

Switching wheels (front/rear)(**)

YES

NO

–

Operation(*)Given as an alternative in the Owner Handbook and available from Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY(**)Not cross-swapped (tyres must stay on the same side).

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
121

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

REFUELLING THE CARFUEL TANK CAP

Stop the engine before refuelling.

The fuel flap is unlocked when the central locking system is released
and automatically locked when the central locking system is applied.

PETROL ENGINESSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXOnly use unleaded petrol. The petrol octane rating (RON) must not belower than 95. In order to prevent damage to the catalytic converter
never introduce even the smallest amount of leaded petrol, even in theevent of an emergency.
DIESEL ENGINES
Use only diesel fuel compliant with European specification EN590. The
use of other products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond
repair and consequently invalidate the warranty, due to the damage
caused.

Opening
Open flap A fig. 88, pulling it outwards, hold cap B still, insert theignition key in the lock and turn it anticlockwise. Then turn the cap
anticlockwise and remove it.
The plug is provided with a loss prevention device C which secures it to
the flap, so it cannot be lost. Attach the cap to device D during
refuelling.

Operation at low temperatures
If the outside temperature is very low, the diesel thickens due to theformation of paraffin clots with consequent defective operation of thefuel supply system.
In order to avoid these problems, different types of diesel fuel are
distributed according to the season: summer type, winter type andarctic type (cold/mountain areas). If refuelling with diesel fuel whosefeatures are not suitable for the temperature of use, it is advisable
to mix TUTELA DIESEL ART additive with the fuel, in the proportions
shown on the container. Pour the additive into the tank before the fuel.
When using or parking the vehicle for a long time in the mountains
or cold areas, it is advisable to refuel using locally available fuel.
In this case, it is also advisable to keep the tank over 50% full.

Alfawiki.nl
122

fig. 88

A0J0327

Closure
Fit the cap (complete with key) and turn it clockwise until it clicks onceor more. Then turn the key clockwise and extract it, then close the flap.
The sealing may cause a slight pressure increase in the tank. A little
breathing off, while slackening the cap is absolutely normal.
Do not place naked flames or lit cigarettes near to thefuel filler: fire risk. Also, keep your face away fromthis fuel inlet to avoid inhaling harmful fumes.

PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
The following devices are used for reducing petrol fuel engine
emissions: catalytic converter, oxygen sensors and evaporation control
systemThe following devices are used for reducing diesel fuel engine
emissions: oxidising catalytic converter, exhaust gas recirculation
system (EGR) and particulate filter (DPF).
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)(for versions/markets, where provided)
This is a mechanical filter, fitted in the exhaust system, which almost
completely eliminates carbon particle emissions.
The catalytic converter and particulate filter (DPF) reachvery high temperatures during operation. Therefore
do not park the car on flammable materials (grass, dry
leaves, pine needles etc.): fire hazard.

GETTING TOKNOW YOUR CAR

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
123

SAFETYGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSEAT BELTS

The rear seat is fitted with inertia seat belts with three anchor points
and a reel. Fasten the rear seat belts as shown in fig. 90.

USING THE SEAT BELTS
SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

Wear the belt keeping the torso straight and rested against thebackrest. To fasten the belts, hold the tongue A fig. 89 and insert it into
the buckle B, until you hear it click into place.
On removal, if the belt jams, let it rewind for a short stretch, then pull it
out again without jerking.
To release the belt, press button C. Guide the belt while it is rewinding
to prevent it from twisting.

Remember that, in the event of a violent impact,
front-seat passengers who are not wearing their seatbelts not only expose themselves to significant riskof injury, but also represent a danger to passengers occupying
the front seats.

Never press button C fig. 89 when travelling.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 89

124

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0101

fig. 90

A0J0102

IMPORTANT The backrest is correctly secured when the red band B fig.
91 on backrest folding handle A disappears. This red band indicatesthat the backrest is not secured.
IMPORTANT When putting the rear seat back in its normal position,
make sure that the seat belts are positioned so that they are readyto use.
Make sure that the backrest is correctly secured on
both sides (red bands B not visible) to prevent it frommoving forward in the event of sharp braking, causing
injuries to passengers.

SBR SYSTEM (Seat Belt
Reminder)This system comprises an acoustic signal which, in conjunction with thewarning light flashing on the instrument panel display, warns thedriver and front passenger if their seat belts have not been fastened.
On some versions there is also a panel (provided as an alternative
to the warning lights on the instrument panel) located above theinterior rear view mirror, which warns the front and back seatpassengers via acoustic and visual signals if their seat belts have notbeen fastened.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to deactivate this systempermanently. The SBR system can only be reactivated via the display
Set Up Menu (see the “Menu Options” paragraph in the “Knowing
your car” section).

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 91

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0182

fig. 92

A0J0339125

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

The warning lights may be red or green and operate as follows:❒ 1 = front left seat (driver status for left-hand drive versions);❒ 2 = rear left seat (passenger);❒ 3 = rear centre seat (passenger);❒ 4 = rear right seat (passenger);❒ 5 = front right seat (passenger status for left-hand drive versions).
NOTE On versions equipped with sports front seats, the passenger sideseat belt fastened indication (warning light 1 for RHD versions or
warning light 5 for LHD versions) will never be displayed.
Front seats (warning light no. 1 =driver and no. 5 = passenger)
DriverIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXIf the driver is the only occupant and their seat belt is not fastened,
when 20 km/h is exceeded or when travelling at a speed between 10
and 20 km/h for longer than 5 seconds, an acoustic signal cycle
will be started for the front seats (continuous acoustic signal for
6 seconds followed by a 90 second beep). The warning light will flash.
The warning lights will stay on constantly at the end of the cycle until
the engine is stopped. The acoustic signal will be interrupted
immediately when the driver’s seat belt is fastened and the warning
light will turn green.
The reminder cycle (acoustic and visual) will be repeated as describedabove and the red warning light will flash if the seat belt is unfastenedagain while travelling.

Passenger
A similar situation applies to the front passenger, with the difference
that the warning light turns green and the indication is also interrupted
when the passenger leaves the car.
If both front seat belts are unfastened a few seconds apart while thecar is travelling, the acoustic signal will refer to the most recent eventand the two warning lights will proceed with the visual indication
independently.
Rear seats (warning light no. 2, no.
3 and no. 4)
For the rear seats, the reminder cycle is only activated when any seatbelt is unfastened (flashing red).
In this condition, the warning light for the seat belt which has been
unfastened will flash (red) for approximately 30 seconds. An acoustic
signal is also emitted.
The visual indication (flashing red) will start and stop independently foreach warning light if several seat belts are unfastened. The warning
light will become green when the relevant seat belt is fastened again.
The rear seat warning lights will switch off, regardless of the stateof the belt (red or green) approximately 30 seconds after the last
signal.
IMPORTANTThe warning lights are all off if all seat belts (front and rear) arealready fastened when the ignition key is turned to MAR.
All warning lights switch on when at least one belt changes fromfastened to unfastened or vice versa.

Alfawiki.nl
126

PRETENSIONERSLOAD LIMITERS

The car is equipped with front seat belt pretensioners, which draw
back the seat belts by several centimetres in the event of a violent
frontal impact. This guarantees the perfect adherence of the seat belts
to the occupants’ bodies before the restraining action begins.
It is evident that the pretensioners have been activated when the belt
withdraws towards the reel.
The car is also equipped with a second pretensioner (in the kick platearea). Its activation is signalled by the shortening of the metal cable.
A slight discharge of smoke may be produced during the activation of
the pretensioner. This is not harmful and does not indicate the startof a fire.

To increase protection, the front seat belt reels contain a load limiter
which controls the force acting on the chest and shoulders during
the belt restraining action in the event of a head-on collision.

IMPORTANT To obtain the highest degree of protection from the actionof the pretensioner, wear the seat belt tight to the chest and pelvis.
The pretensioner does not require any maintenance or lubrication: anychanges to its original conditions will invalidate its efficiency. If, due
to exceptional natural events (floods, sea storms, etc.), the device
has been affected by water and mud, it must be replaced.

Operations which lead to knocks, vibrations or localised
heating (over 100°C for a maximum of 6 hours) in the areaaround the pretensioners may cause damage or trigger
them. These devices are not affected by vibrations caused byirregularities of the road surface or low obstacles such as kerbs, etc.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services for any assistance necessary.

The pretensioner may be used only once. Once it has
been activated, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to have it replaced. Consult the plate in the
glove compartment to check the status of the device. Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services to have the device replaced whenthe expiration date approaches.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
127

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR USINGTHE SEAT BELTS
Comply with (and ensure that all the other occupants of the car complywith) the local laws in force regarding the use of seat belts. Always
fasten the seat belts before starting off.
Seat belts must also be worn by pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for them and the unborn child ifthey are wearing a seat belt.
Pregnant women must position the lower part of the belt very low
down so that it passes over the pelvis and under the abdomen fig. 93.
The belt must not be twisted. The upper part must pass over theshoulder and cross the chest diagonally. The lower part must adhere to
the pelvis fig. 94, not to the abdomen. Never use devices (clips, pegs,etc.) to hold the seat belt away from your body.

For maximum protection, keep the backrest upright,
lean back into it and make sure the seat belt fitsclosely across your chest and pelvis. Always fasten theseat belts on both the front and the rear seats! Travelling withoutwearing seat belts will increase the risk of serious injury andeven death in the event of an accident.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 93128

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0094

fig. 94

A0J0095

Each seat belt must be used by only one person. Never travel with achild sitting on a passenger’s lap and a single belt to protect them bothfig. 95. In general, do not place any objects between the person andbelt.
Removing or otherwise tampering with safety belt andpretensioner components is strictly prohibited. Any
operations on these components must be performed byqualified and authorised technicians. Always contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.

If the belt has been subjected to high levels of stress,for example after an accident, it should be changed
completely together with the attachments, attachment
fixing screws and the pretensioner. In fact, even if the belt has no
visible defects, it may have lost its resilience.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE❒ Always use the belt with the strap well stretched and never twisted;make sure that it is free to run without obstructions;❒ replace the belt after an accident of a certain severity even if it does
not appear to be damaged. Always replace the belt if thepretensioners were deployed;❒ hand wash the seat belts with water and neutral soap, rinse andleave to dry in the shade. Do not use strong detergents, bleach,colourants or any other substance which could damage the belt
fibres;❒ prevent the reels from getting wet: their correct operation is only
guaranteed if water does not get inside;❒ replace the seat belt when there is wear or cuts.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 95

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0096

129

CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELYGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

For optimal protection in the event of a collision, all passengers must
be seated and wearing adequate restraint systems. This is even more
important for children.
This prescription is compulsory in all EC countries according to EC
Directive 2003/20/EC. Compared with adults, a child's head is
proportionally larger and heavier than the rest of the body, while
muscles and bone structure are not fully developed. Therefore, correct
restraint systems are necessary which are different from adult seatbelts.
Over 1.50 m in height, from the point of view of restraint systems,
children are considered as adults and wear the seat belts normally.
The results of research in relation to the best protection for children issummarised in European Regulation EEC-R44, which divides the
restraint systems into five groups in addition to making their use
compulsory:
Group

Weight groups

Group 0

up to 10 kg

Group 0+

up to 13 kgGroup 1

9-18 kgGroup 2

15-25 kgGroup 322-36 kgLineaccessori Alfa Romeo includes child seats for each weight group.
These devices are recommended having been specifically tested for
Alfa Romeo cars.

All restraint devices must bear the type-approval data along with thecontrol mark on a label firmly secured to the child seat which mustnever be removed.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
130

Do not arrange cradle child seats facing backwards if
the front passenger side airbag is enabled.
Deployment of the airbag in an accident could cause
fatal injuries to the baby regardless of the severity of thecollision. It is advisable to always carry children in a child seat on
the rear seat, which is the most protected position in the eventof a collision.

Should it be absolutely necessary to carry a child on thefront seat in a backwards-facing cradle seat, thepassenger's front and side air bags must be deactivatedthrough the Setup menu. Deactivation should be verified bychecking the warning light on the instrument panel.
The passenger seat must also be slid back as far as possible in order
to avoid the child seat from coming into contact with the dashboard.

FITTING “UNIVERSAL” CHILDSEAT (with seat belts)

GROUP 1
From 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, children may be carried facing forwards
fig. 97.

GROUP 0 and 0+
Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing backwards on a cradle seat,
which, supporting the head, does not induce stress on the neck in theevent of sharp deceleration.
The cradle is restrained by the car seat belts, as shown in fig. 96 and it
must restrain the child in turn with its own belts.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

The figures are only examples for fitting purposes. Fit
the child seat according to the instructions, which must
be included with the seat itself.

SAFETYChild seats with Isofix attachments are available,
which allow them to be secured to the seat safely
without using the car seat belts.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 96

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0097

fig. 97

A0J0371131

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARGROUP 2

GROUP 3

Children from 15 to 25 kg may use the car seat belts directly fig. 98.
The child seat is needed only to position the child correctly with respect
to the belts, so that the diagonal section crosses the child’s chest andnever the neck, and the horizontal section is snug on the pelvis, not theabdomen.

For children from 22 kg up to 36 kg suitable risers are available toposition the seat belt correctly.
fig. 99 shows an example of correct child seat positioning on the rear
seat.

SAFETYThe figures are only examples for fitting purposes. Fit
the child seat according to the instructions, which must
be included with the seat itself.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 98

132

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0099

fig. 99

A0J0100

SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR UNIVERSAL CHILD SEAT USE
The car complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC which governs the arrangement possibilities for child restraints on the various seatsof the car as shown in the following table:
Weight groups

Front passenger

Rear side and central
passenger

Group 0, 0+

up to 13 kg

UUGroup 1

9-18 kg

U

U

Group 2

15-25 kg

U

U

Group 322-36 kgGroupU
U= Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category, according to European Standard EEC-R44 for the specified "Groups".

U

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
133

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

Main safety rules to be followed
when carrying children❒ Install the child seats on the rear seat, which is the most protected
position in the event of an accident;❒ if the front passenger airbag is deactivated always check thewarning light on the instrument panel to make sure that it has
actually been deactivated.
❒ Follow the instructions supplied with the child seat itself, which the
manufacturer must provide. Keep the instructions in the car alongwith the other documents and this handbook. Do not use child seatswithout instructions;❒ always check that the seat belt is well fastened by pulling on it;❒ only one child is to be strapped into each retaining system; nevercarry two children using one child seat;❒ always check that the belts do not rest on the child’s neck;❒ while travelling, do not let the child sit incorrectly or release thebelts;❒ never carry children on your lap, even newborns. No-one could
restrain them in the event of an accident;❒ in the event of an accident, replace the child seat with a new one.

PREPARATION FOR “ISOFIX”
CHILD SEATThe car can be fitted with a Universal Isofix child seat, a new European
standardised system for carrying children safely.
Isofix systems can be fitted alongside traditional child seats.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
134

fig. 100

A0J0093An example of a Universal Isofix child seat for weight group 1 isshown in fig. 100.
The other weight groups are covered by the specific Isofix child seat,
which can be used only if specifically designed, tested and approved
for this car (see car list provided with the child seat).
IMPORTANT The central rear seat is not approved for any type of Isofix
child seats
INSTALLING A UNIVERSAL ISOFIXCHILD SEAT
Proceed as follows:❒ secure the child seat to the dedicated lower metal rings A fig. 101,
positioned between the backrest and the cushion of the rear seat;❒ fix the upper belt (available together with the seat) to the special
attachments B fig. 102 located in the rear part of the backrest.

Traditional systems can be fitted alongside “Universal Isofix” childseats. Remember that, when using a "Universal Isofix" child seat, you
can only use type-approved seats with the marking ECE R44/03“Universal Isofix”.
The Universal Isofix “Duo Plus” child seat and the specific “G 0/1” seat
are available from Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo.
For further details on child seat installation and/or use, refer to the
instruction manual provided with the child seat.
Fit the child seat only when the car is stationary. The
child seat is correctly secured to the brackets when you
hear the click. Follow the instructions for fitting,removing and positioning that the manufacturer must supply
with the child seat.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 101

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0092

fig. 102

A0J0335

135

SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR ISOFIX CHILD SEAT USE
GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

The table below shows the various installation possibilities for Isofix child seats on seats fitted with Isofix attachments in accordance with European
standard ECE 16.
Weight group

SAFETY

Portable cradle
Group 0 up to 10 kg

STARTING AND
DRIVING

Group 0+ up to 13 kg

IN AN EMERGENCY
Group 1 from 9 up to
18kg

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSChild seat position

Isofix size class

Facing backwards

left sideright side

F

X

X

Facing backwards

G

X

X

Facing backwards

E

X

X

Facing backwards

E

X

X

Facing backwards

D

X

X

Facing backwards

C

X

X

Facing backwards

D

X

X

Facing backwards

C

X

X

Facing forwards

B

IUF

IUF

Facing forwards

BI

IUF

IUF

Facing forwards
A
X
X
X: Isofix position not suitable for child seats in this weight group and/or size class.
IUF: Suitable for Isofix restraint systems to be positioned facing forwards, universal class (fitted with third upper mounting), type-approved for the relevant weightgroup.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
136

Rear passenger

FRONT AIRBAGSThe car is equipped with multi-stage front airbags (“Smart bags”) for
the driver and passenger and knee bags for the driver.
“SMART BAG” SYSTEM (MULTISTAGE
FRONT AIRBAGS)The front airbags (driver's and passenger's) and the driver's knee bag
have been designed to protect the occupants in the event of head-on
crashes of medium-high severity, by placing cushions between theoccupant and the steering wheel or dashboard.
Therefore non-deployment in other types of impacts (side impacts, rearshunts, roll-overs, etc.) does not indicate a system malfunction.
The airbags do not replace, but rather complement, the use of seatbelts, which should always be worn. In the event of an impact,someone not wearing a seat belt could move forward and come into
contact with a bag which is still in the opening phase. The protection
offered by the bag is reduced in such a case.

Front airbags may not activate in the following situations:❒ frontal impacts against highly deformable objects not involving thefront surface of the car (e.g. wing collision against guard rail);❒ jamming of the car underneath other vehicles or protective barriers(e.g. underneath a truck or a guard rail); in this case, the bags
would offer no additional protection with respect to the seat belt andtheir deployment would be inappropriate. In these cases, nondeployment does not indicate a system malfunction.
Do not apply stickers or other objects to the steering
wheel, to the passenger's side air bag cover or on theroof side lining. Do not place objects on the passenger
side of the dashboard because these could interfere with thecorrect opening of the passenger airbag and cause injury tooccupants.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
137

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYFRONT DRIVER SIDE AIRBAG

FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG

This is located in a dedicated compartment in the centre of the steering
wheel fig. 103.

This is located in a dedicated compartment in the dashboard fig. 104.

Always drive with your hands on the steering wheel
rim so that the airbag can inflate freely if necessary.
Do not drive with your body bent forward. Keep theback of your seat upright and lean back into it.

STARTING AND
DRIVING

Do not arrange cradle child seats facing backwards if thefront passenger side airbag is enabled. Deployment of the
airbag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the baby
regardless of the severity of the collision. Always
deactivate the passenger side airbag when placing a childseat on the front seat. The passenger seat must also be slid back as far
as possible in order to avoid the child seat from coming into contact
with the dashboard. Though not required by law, we recommend thatyou reactivate this airbag as soon as the child no longer needs to betransported to ensure better protection for adults.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 103

138

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0047

fig. 104

A0J0050

SIDE AIRBAGS (SIDE BAGS WINDOW BAGS)DRIVER SIDE KNEE BAG
This is located in a dedicated compartment under the steering wheel
fig. 105.
It provides additional protection in the event of a frontal impact.
Deactivating the passenger side front
airbag and side bag (chest/pelvis
protection)
Deactivate the passenger side front airbag and side bags (chest-pelvis
protection) when you have to transport a child on the front seat. With
the airbags deactivated, the warning light switches on in the
instrument panel.

The car is fitted with front side bags for driver and passenger,
protecting the chest/pelvis, and window bags for protecting front andrear passengers’ heads.
Side bags protect occupants from side-on crashes of medium/highseverity by placing the bag between the occupant and the internal
parts of the side structure of the car.
Non-activation of side bags in other types of collisions (head-on
collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc...) is not an indication of system
malfunction.

To deactivate the airbags, see the “Knowing your car”
section, “Menu Options” paragraph.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 105

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0056

139

FRONT SIDE AIRBAGS (SIDE BAGS)GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

These comprise two types of bags located in the front seat backrests
fig. 106, which protect the chest and pelvis area of occupants inthe event of a side impact of medium-high severity.
SIDE AIRBAGS FOR HEAD PROTECTION(WINDOW BAGS)This comprises two “curtain” window bags located behind the side roof
cover and are covered by special trim fig. 107. They are designed toprotect the head of front and rear passengers in the event of sidecollisions, thanks to the wide cushion inflation surface.
The airbags are not deployed in the event of low-severity impacts (forwhich the retaining action of the seat belts is sufficient). It is therefore
always necessary to wear seat belts.
In the event of a side impact, the system provides optimum protection if
the passenger assumes the correct position on the seat, thus allowing
correct window bag deployment.

Do not hook rigid objects to the coat hooks or to the
support handles.

Do not rest your head, arms or elbows on the door,
windows or the area in which the window bag islocated to avoid possible injury during inflation.

Never lean your head, arms or elbows out of thewindow.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 106140

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0103

fig. 107

A0J0051

IMPORTANT
Do not wash the seats with water or pressurised steam (by hand or at
automatic seat washing stations).
The front airbags and/or side bags may be deployed if the car is
subject to violent impacts involving the underbody area (e.g. violent
impacts against steps or kerbs, big holes or dips in the road etc.).
When the airbag deploys it emits a small amount of dust: the dust isharmless and does not indicate the beginning of a fire. The dust may
irritate the skin and eyes however: in this case, wash with neutral soap
and water.
All operations on airbags (inspection, repair and replacement) must be
carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
If the car is to be scrapped, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services tohave the airbag system deactivated.
Pretensioners and airbags are deployed in different ways, according to
the type of impact. Failure to deploy of one of the devices does notnecessarily indicate a system malfunction.

If the warning light does not switch on when the
key is turned to MAR, or stays on while driving (onsome versions together with a message on the display)there may be a fault in the restraint systems. In this case, airbags
or pretensioners may not be activated in the case of an accidentor (in a lesser number of cases) they may be activatedincorrectly. Before proceeding, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to have the system checked immediately.

The expiry dates of the explosive charge and the clock
spring are shown on a specific label contained in the
glove compartment. When these dates approach,contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have them replaced.

deployed.

Do not travel carrying objects in your lap, in front of
your chest or between your lips (pipe, pencils, etc.):
they could cause severe injury if the airbag is

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE
If the car has been subject to theft, attempted theft,vandalism, or flooding, have the airbag systeminspected at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
141

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

The airbags may also be deployed when the car is notmoving, if the key is in the ignition and turned to MAReven when the engine is off, if the car is hit by anothermoving vehicle. For this reason, children must never sit on thefront seat, even if the car is not moving. Also remember that nosafety device (airbags or pretensioners) will activate in the eventof impact when the key is at STOP. Non-deployment of thesedevices under these circumstances does not therefore indicate asystem malfunction.

When the ignition key is turned to MAR, thewarning light (with passenger side front airbag
activated) switches on and flashes for a few seconds toremind you that the passenger airbag will be deployed in acrash, after which it should switch off.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
142

The front airbag is designed to be deployed for
impacts of a greater intensity than for thepretensioners. For impacts whose intensity falls
between the two levels, it is normal for only the pretensioners tobe activated.

STARTING AND DRIVINGSTARTING THE ENGINEEngine starting for Turbo TwinAir versions
Proceed as follows:❒ Engage the handbrake and place the gear lever in neutral or fullypress the clutch pedal if a gear other than neutral is engaged;❒ turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine
starts.

PROCEDURE FOR PETROL VERSIONS(excluding Turbo TwinAir versions)
Proceed as follows:❒ engage the handbrake and place the gearbox lever in neutral;❒ fully depress the clutch pedal, without touching the accelerator;❒ turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine
starts.
IMPORTANT❒ If the engine does not start at the first attempt, return the ignition key
to STOP before repeating the starting procedure.
❒ If, when the ignition key is at MAR, the instrument panel warning
light(or the symbol on the display) remains on together withwarning light, turn the key to STOP and then back to MAR. If
the warning light remains on, try the other keys provided. If you arestill unable to start the engine contact an Alfa Romeo Authorised
Service Provider.
❒ Never leave the ignition key at MAR when the engine is stopped.

Note If the vehicle does not start at the first attempt, return the ignition
key to STOP and repeat the starting procedure placing the gear leverin neutral and fully pressing the clutch pedal.
IMPORTANT❒ If, when the ignition key is at MAR, the instrument panel warning
light(or the symbol on the display) remains on together withwarning light, turn the key to STOP and then back to MAR. If
the warning light remains on, try the other keys provided. If you arestill unable to start the engine contact an Alfa Romeo Authorised
Service Provider.
❒ Never leave the ignition key at MAR when the engine is stopped.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
143

PROCEDURE FOR DIESEL VERSIONSGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

Proceed as follows:❒ engage the handbrake and place the gearbox lever in neutral;❒ turn the ignition key to MAR-ON: the warning lights
and(or the symbol on the display) on the instrument panel willswitch on;❒ wait for the warning lights (or the symbol on the display) to switchoff;❒ fully depress the clutch pedal, without touching the accelerator;❒ turn the ignition key to AVV;
warning light switches off.
Waiting too long will waste the heating work carried out by theglow plugs. Release the key as soon as the engine starts.
If thewarning light flashes for about 1 minute after
starting or during prolonged cranking, this indicates a fault
in the glow plug preheating system. Use the car normallyif the engine starts and go to Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon
as possible.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

It is dangerous to run the engine in enclosed areas. The
engine takes in oxygen and releases carbon dioxide,
carbon monoxide and other toxic gases.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
144

first used.

It is advisable not to demand maximum performance fromyour car (e.g. excessive acceleration, long distances at
maximum rpm, excessively intense braking, etc.) when it isWhen the engine is off, do not leave the ignition key turned
to MAR to prevent unnecessary electrical consumption fromdraining the battery.
Remember that the brake servo and electromechanicalpower steering are not operational until the engine
has been started, therefore much more effort thanusual is required on the brake pedal and steering wheel.

Never start the engine by pushing, towing or driving
downhill. These manoeuvres may damage the catalytic
converter.

PARKING

WARMING UP THE ENGINE JUSTAFTER IT HAS STARTED
Proceed as follows:❒ drive off slowly, letting the engine turn at medium revs and without
accelerating abruptly;❒ do not demand maximum performance for the first few kilometres. It
is advisable to wait until the engine coolant temperature indicator
starts moving.

Switch off the engine and pull up the handbrake. Engage a gear (1st if
the car is facing uphill or reverse if it is facing downhill) and leave
the wheels steered to one side.
If the car is parked on a steep slope block the wheels with a wedge orstone. Always remove the ignition key when leaving the car.
Never leave children unattended in the car. Always
remove the key from the ignition when leaving the car
and take it with you.

STOPPING THE ENGINE
Turn the ignition key to STOP while the engine is idling.
IMPORTANT After a demanding drive, before turning the engine off
you should allow it to idle to allow the temperature in the engine
compartment to decrease.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGHANDBRAKETo engage the handbrake pull lever A fig. 108 upwards until the car issecured. To release the handbrake, raise lever A slightly, hold down
button B and lower the lever.

A quick burst on the accelerator before stopping the engine
serves absolutely no practical purpose. It wastes fuel andis especially damaging to turbocharged engines.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl

fig. 108

A0J0110145

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETY

IMPORTANT Carry out these manoeuvres with the brake pedal
pressed.
IMPORTANT For cars equipped with a front armrest, lift this up to
ensure that it does not interfere with the action of the handbrake.

USING THE GEARBOXTo engage the gears, fully depress the clutch pedal and put the gear
lever into the desired position (the diagram for gear engagement
is shown on the knob fig. 109, fig. 110, fig. 111).

The car should be locked after a few notches: if this is
not the case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
to have the handbrake adjusted.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY
fig. 109

A0J0265

fig. 110

A0J0266

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
146

On models with 6 gears, to engage 6th gear, press the lever slightly tothe right to avoid changing into 4th by mistake. The same applies to theshift from 6th to 5th gear.
To engage reverse (R) from neutral position, raise ring A underneaththe knob and, at the same time:❒ on 1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP Quadrifoglio Verde and 1.6 JTDM
versions, move the lever to the left and then forwards fig. 110;
❒ on Turbo TwinAir, 1.4 Petrol, 1.4 MultiAir, 1.4 Turbo MultiAir and
1.3 JTDM-2 versions, move the lever to the right and then backwards
fig. 109 and fig. 111.

IMPORTANT Reverse can only be engaged when the car is completely
stationary.
Press the clutch pedal fully to change gears correctly. It
is therefore essential that there is nothing under thepedals: make sure the mats are lying flat and do not
get in the way of the pedals.

Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear lever as
the force exerted, even if slight, could lead over time topremature wear of the gearbox internal components.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 111

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0267147

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

SAVING FUELElectrical devices

Here are some suggestions which can help you to save fuel and lower
harmful emissions.

Only use electrical devices for the time needed. The heated rearwindow, additional headlights, windscreen wipers and heater fan
require a considerable amount of energy; increasing the current uptake
increases fuel consumption (by up to +25% in an urban cycle).

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONSSAFETY

Climate control system

Car maintenanceHave checks and adjustments carried out in accordance with the“Scheduled Servicing Plan” (see chapter “Maintenance and care”).

STARTING AND
DRIVINGTyres

IN AN EMERGENCY

Unnecessary loads

Using the climate control system will increase consumption: use the air
vents when the external temperature allows it.
Devices for aerodynamic control

Check the tyre pressure at least once every 4 weeks: if the pressure is
too low, consumption levels increase as resistance to rolling is higher.

The use of non-certified devices for aerodynamic control may adversely
affect air drag and fuel consumption.

Do not travel with an overloaded boot. The weight of the car and its
arrangement greatly affect fuel consumption and stability.
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSRoof rack/ski rack
Remove the roof rack or the ski rack from the roof after use. These
accessories lower aerodynamic penetration and adversely affectconsumption levels. It is better to use a trailer to transport particularly
bulky objects.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
148

DRIVING STYLECONDITIONS OF USE

Starting

Cold starting

Do not warm up the engine at low or high revs when the vehicle isstationary; this causes the engine to warm up more slowly, thereby
increasing fuel consumption and emissions. It is therefore advisable tomove off immediately, slowly, avoiding high speeds: in this way theengine will warm up more quickly.

Short distances and frequent cold start-ups will prevent the engine fromreaching optimal running temperature. This results in a significant
increase in consumption levels (from +15 to +30% on the urban cycle)
and emissions.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETY

Traffic and road conditions

Unnecessary actions
Avoid revving up when at traffic lights or before switching off theengine. The latter action, like double-declutching, is unnecessary andcauses increased fuel consumption and pollution.

High fuel consumption is caused by heavy traffic, for instance whentravelling in a queue with frequent use of low gears or in large towns
with many traffic lights. Winding mountain roads and rough roadsurfaces also adversely affect consumption.

Gear selection

Stops in traffic

Use a higher gear when traffic and road conditions allow it. Using a
low gear for faster acceleration will increase consumption. In the sameway improper use of a high gear increases consumption, emissions
and engine wear.

During prolonged stops (e.g. level crossings) switch the engine off.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

Maximum speed
Fuel consumption considerably increases as speed increases. Keepyour speed as even as possible, avoiding unnecessary braking andacceleration which cause excessive fuel consumption and increased
emissions.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

Acceleration
Accelerating violently severely affects consumption and emissions:acceleration should be gradual and should not exceed the maximum
torque.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
149

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

TOWING TRAILERSINSTALLING A TOW HOOK

IMPORTANTThe vehicle must be provided with a type-approved tow hook andadequate electrical system to tow caravans or trailers. Installation must
be carried out by a specialist.
Fit any specific and/or additional rear view mirrors as specified by the
Highway Code.
Remember that, when towing a trailer, steep hills are harder to climb,
braking distances increase and overtaking takes longer relative tothe overall weight of the trailer.
Engage a low gear when driving downhill, rather than constantly using
the brake.
The weight of the trailer reduces the load capacity of the car by thesame amount. Consider the weight at full load, including accessories
and luggage, to make sure you do not exceed the maximum towableweight (shown in the registration document).
Respect the speed limits specific to each country for vehicles towing
trailers. In any case do not exceed 100 km/h.

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services to install a tow hook.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
150

The ABS with which the car is equipped will not control
the braking system of the trailer. Particular caution istherefore required on slippery roads.

Do not, under any circumstances, modify the vehicle's
braking system to control the trailer breaking system.
The towing breaking system must be completely
independent of the vehicle's hydraulic system.

SNOW TYRESSNOW CHAINS

Use snow tyres of the same size as the normal tyres provided with thecar: Alfa Romeo Authorized Services will be able to advise you on
the most appropriate tyre to use.
Only use these tyres in the event of ice or snow on the roads.
For the type of snow tyre to be used, inflation pressures and thespecifications, strictly follow the instructions given in the "Wheels"paragraph in the "Technical specifications" section.
The winter performance of these tyres is considerably reduced when
the tread thickness is less than 4 mm. Replace them in this case.
Due to their specific features, the performance of snow tyres is much
lower than that of normal types in normal conditions or long motorway
stretches. Their usage should therefore be restricted in accordancewith their type approval.
All four tyres should be the same (brand and track) to ensure greater
safety when driving and braking and good driveability. Rememberthat it is inadvisable to change the rotation direction of tyres.

The use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations.
The snow chains may be applied only onto the front wheel tyres (drive
wheels).
Check the tension of the snow chains after the first few metres havebeen driven.
Use reduced size snow chains: on all versions, for 195/55 R16" and205/55 R16" size tyres use low-clearance snow chains with amaximum projection beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

IMPORTANT The space-saver wheel cannot be fitted with snow chains.
If a front (drive) wheel is punctured and snow chains must be used,
you must remove a normal wheel from the rear and replace this one
with the space-saver wheel. In this way, with two normal drive wheels,
it is possible to use snow chains.

STARTING AND
DRIVING

The maximum speed for snow tyres marked “Q” is160 km/h, while it is 190 km/h for “T” tyres and 210km/h for "H" tyres. The highway code speed limits
must however always be complied with.

SAFETYIN AN EMERGENCY
Keep your speed down when snow chains are fitted; do not
exceed 50 km/h. Avoid potholes, steps and pavements
and avoid driving long distances on roads not covered withsnow to avoid damaging the car and the roadbed.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
151

STORING THE CARGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

If the car is to be left inactive for longer than a month, the following
precautions should be noted:❒ park the vehicle in a dry, covered and, if possible, ventilated area;
engage a gear and check that the handbrake is not engaged;❒ disconnect the negative battery terminal and check the battery
charge. Repeat this check once every three months during storage;❒ if you have not disconnected the battery, check the battery charge
every thirty days;❒ clean and protect the painted parts using protective wax;
❒ clean and protect the shiny metal parts using special compounds
available commercially;❒ sprinkle talcum powder on the windscreen and rear window wiper
rubber blades and lift them off the glass;❒ slightly open the windows;❒ cover the car with a cloth or perforated plastic sheet. Do not use
compact plastic sheets which do not allow humidity to evaporate
from the surface of the car.
❒ inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above the standard specified pressure andcheck it at intervals;❒ do not drain the engine cooling system.
IMPORTANT After turning the ignition key to STOP, wait at least 1
minute before disconnecting the battery power supply.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl152

IN AN EMERGENCYGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR
In an emergency we recommend that you call the freephone number found in the Warranty Booklet. You can also
consult www.alfaromeo.com to find your nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

STARTING THE ENGINE
If thewarning light on the instrument panel remains on constantly,
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services immediately.
JUMP STARTING
If the battery is flat, the engine may be started using an auxiliary
battery with the same capacity or a little higher than the flat one.
Proceed as follows to start the vehicle:❒ connect the positive terminals (+ sign near the terminal) of the twobatteries with a jump lead fig. 112;

❒ with a second cable, connect the negative terminal ( – ) of theauxiliary battery to an earthing point on the engine or the
gearbox of the car to be started;❒ start the engine; afterwards, follow the sequence above in reverse
order to remove the cables.
For versions with Start&Stop system, to carry out the jump starting
procedure, refer to the paragraph “Start&Stop system” in the “Getting
to know your car” section.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services if you cannot start the engine
after several attempts.
IMPORTANT Never connect the negative terminals of the two batteries
directly! If the auxiliary battery is installed on another car, prevent
accidental contact between metallic parts of the two cars.
Never use a fast battery-charger to start the engine as this
could damage the electronic systems of your car,particularly the ignition and fuel supply control units.

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 112

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0392

153

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

This starting procedure must be performed by expert
personnel because incorrect actions could cause
electrical discharge of considerable intensity.
Furthermore, battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive: avoid
contact with skin and eyes. Keep naked flames and lighted
cigarettes away from the battery and do not cause sparks.

SAFETYBUMP STARTINGREPLACING A WHEEL
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
The car is equipped with the “Fix&Go Automatic Kit”: see theparagraph “Fix&Go Automatic Kit” for how to use this device.
As an alternative to the “Fix&Go Automatic Kit” the car may beequipped with a space-saver wheel: see the instructions on thefollowing pages for changing the tyre.

Never start the engine by pushing, towing or coasting downhill.
STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

Alert other drivers that the car is stationary incompliance with local regulations: hazard warning
lights, warning triangle, etc. Any passengers on board
should leave the car, especially if it is heavily laden. Passengers
should stay away from on-coming traffic while the wheel isbeing changed. In case of steep slopes or rough slopes, placewedges or other materials suitable to stop the vehicle under thewheels.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
154

The spare wheel is specific for your car. Do not use it
on cars of different models. Do not use spare wheels ofdifferent models on your car. The space-saver wheel
must only be used in case of emergency. It must only be used forthe distance necessary to reach a service point and the car speed
must not exceed 80 km/h. The space-saver wheel has an orange
sticker that summarises the main cautions for use and limitations.
Never remove or cover the label. Never apply any hub cap to
the space-saver spare wheel.

The vehicle's driving characteristics will be modified
with the space-saver wheel fitted. Avoid violent
acceleration and braking, sharp steering and fast
cornering. The total life of a space-saver wheel is approximately
3,000 km, after which it must be replaced by another wheel ofthe same type. Never attempt to fit a conventional tyre on a rim
designed for use as a space-saver wheel. Repair and refit thestandard wheel as soon as possible. Two or more space-saver
wheels should never be used together. Do not grease the threadsof bolts before fitting them: they might slip out.

JACK
Please note that:❒ the jack weight is 1.76 kg;❒ the jack requires no adjustment;❒ the jack cannot be repaired and in the event of a fault it must be
replaced by another original one;
❒ no tool other than its cranking device may be fitted on the jack.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

The jack provided is only intended to be used for
replacing tyres on the vehicle with which it is supplied,or on same-model vehicles. Never use the jack forother purposes, such as lifting other car models. Never use it for
repair operations under the vehicle. Incorrect positioning of thejack may cause the car to fall. Do not use the jack for loads
higher than those shown on the label. Never install snow chainson the small spare wheel; if a front tyre (driving wheel) ispunctured and you need to use snow chains, use a standard
wheel from the rear axle and install the small spare wheel on therear axle. In this way, with two normal front drive wheels, it ispossible to use snow chains.

IN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

Incorrectly fitting the hubcap may cause it to fall off
when the vehicle is in motion. Never tamper with the
inflating valve. Never introduce tools of any kind
between rim and tyre. Regularly check the inflation pressure of
the tyres and space-saver wheel (see chapter "Technicalspecifications").

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
155

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCY

To change a wheel proceed as follows:❒ stop the car in a position that is not dangerous for oncoming traffic
where you can change the wheel safely. The ground must be flatand sufficiently compact;❒ switch off the engine, pull up the handbrake and engage 1a gear orreverse; put on the high visibility jacket (required by law) before
leaving the vehicle;❒ open the luggage compartment, pull tab A fig. 113 and lift up themat;❒ unscrew locking device Afig. 114, take toolbox B and bring it next
to the wheel to replace. Then take the space-saver wheel C;❒ for versions with steel rims: insert the screwdriver in the
opening A fig. 115 in order to trigger the hub cap retaining clip B;❒ for versions with alloy rims: shake the car to facilitate
detachment of the rim from the wheel hub. Some versions may befitted with alloy wheels with a hub cap (fig. 116). To remove the hub
cap, insert the screwdriver into housings A in order to access the
fixing bolts. Replace the wheel as described previously;❒ take wrench A fig. 117 and loosen the fixing bolts by about one
turn;fig. 114

A0J0105

fig. 115

A0J0236SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 113

156

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0104❒ position the jack under the car, near the wheel to be changed. On
versions where this is fitted, be careful not to damage the plastic
aerodynamic guard;❒ operate the device A fig. 118 so as to extend the jack, until theupper part B fig. 119 is inserted correctly inside the side member C;❒ alert any bystander that the car is about to be raised; all persons
should be kept away from the car and nobody must touch it until
it has been lowered;❒ fit handle D fig. 118 into the housing in device A, operate the jackand raise the car until the wheel is a few centimetres from theground;GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 116

A0J0238

fig. 118

A0J0062SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 117

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0106

fig. 119

A0J0061157

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING❒ make sure the contact surfaces between space-saver wheel and hub
are clean so that the fastening bolts will not come loose;❒ fit the space-saver spare wheel by inserting the first bolt for two
threads into the hole closest to the valve;❒ take the wrench A fig. 117 and fully tighten the fixing bolts;❒ operate the jack handle D fig. 118 to lower the vehicle. Then extract
the jack;❒ use the wrench A fig. 117 provided to fully tighten the bolts in acriss-cross fashion as per the numerical sequence illustrated in
fig. 120;❒ when replacing an alloy wheel it is advisable to place it upside
down, with the aesthetic part facing upwards.

Visit Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible tocheck the correct tightening of the main wheel bolts.
Restore the standard wheel as soon as possible, because, once placedin the associated compartment, the luggage compartment load
platform is rendered uneven as the standard wheel is larger than thespace-saver wheel.

IN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 120

158

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0271

REMOVING THE SUBWOOFER(versions with Bose HI-FI system)(for versions/markets, where provided)
IMPORTANT The following procedure only applies to cars equippedwith Bose HI-FI systems with subwoofer (for versions/markets, where
provided).
Subwoofer and space-saver spare wheel
On these versions, the tools for replacing the wheel are located in a
dedicated bag in the luggage compartment.
Proceed as follows to remove the Subwoofer:❒ open the luggage compartment, pull tab A fig. 113 and lift up themat;❒ unscrew locking device A fig. 121, raise the subwoofer and thenremove connection cable B from the Velcro C;❒ rest the Subwoofer on one side in the luggage compartment, remove
the container and take the space-saver wheel;❒ replace the wheel as described previously.

At the end of the operation:❒ reposition the container (with the arrow pointing forwards) in its
housing and place the subwoofer on top of it, taking care to arrange
it according to the indications on the container (fig. 122) so thatthe word “BOSE” is read in the correct position;❒ rest cable B fig. 121 on the Velcro C to avoid pinching it;❒ screw in locking device A, and finally lower the luggage
compartment mat.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 121

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0180

fig. 122

A0J0260

159

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETY

Subwoofer and "Fix&Go Automatic Kit"
Locating the Automatic Fix&Go Kit:
❒ open the luggage compartment, pull tab A fig. 113 and lift up themat;❒ take the “Fix&Go Automatic Kit” located on the left side of theluggage compartment ( fig. 123);❒ inflate the wheel (see paragraph entitled “Fix&Go Automatic Kit”).

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCEREFITTING THE WHEEL
Following the procedure described previously, raise the car andremove the small spare wheel.
Proceed as follows:❒ make sure the contact surfaces between standard wheel and hub areclean so that the fastening bolts will not come loose;❒ for versions with steel rims: fix the hub cap on the rim,aligning the crescent hole with the bolt you have fitted, then insert
the other 4 bolts;❒ tighten the retaining bolts using wrench A fig. 117;
❒ lower the car and remove the jack;❒ use wrench A fig. 117 to fully tighten the bolts, following thesequence illustrated in❒ for versions with alloy rims with hub cap: align the pin on
the cap with the housing on the rim.
At the end of operation❒ stow the space-saver spare wheel in the compartment provided in
the boot;❒ insert the jack and the other tools in the container;❒ arrange the container and tools on the space-saver wheel;❒ correctly reposition the boot mat.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 123

160

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0239

"Fix&Go Automatic" kitGive the leaflet to the technicians who will be handlingthe tyre that was treated using the "Fix&Go Automatic"
kit.

This is located in the luggage compartment.
The kit container also contains a screwdriver and the tow hook.
The kit also contains:❒ a bottle fig. 124 containing sealer and fitted with: filling tube B andadhesive label C with the wording “max. 80 km/h” to be placed ina clearly visible position (e.g. on the dashboard) after repairing
the tyre;❒ a compressor D complete with pressure gauge and connectors;❒ an information leaflet fig. 125, providing instructions for using the
kit correctly. This booklet should be given to the persons charged
with handling the tyre treated with this kit;
❒ a pair of gloves located in the side compartment of the compressor;❒ adapters for inflating different elements.

In the event of a puncture caused by foreign bodies, the kit
may be used to repair tyres showing damage on the trackor shoulder up to max 4 mm diameter.
Holes and damage on the tyre side walls cannot be
repaired. Do not use the tyre quick repair kit if the tyreis damaged as a result of driving with it deflated.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCY

IMPORTANT The sealing liquid is suitable for use at temperatures in therange from –20°C to +50°C. The sealant has an expiry date.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 124

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0112

fig. 125

A0J0113161

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCY

the tyre.

Repairs are not possible in the case of damage to thewheel rim (bad groove distortion causing air loss).
Do not remove foreign bodies (screws or nails) from

Never operate the compressor for longer than 20
consecutive minutes. Risk of overheating. The kit is notsuitable for definitive repairs, so the repaired tyres
may only be used temporarily.

Dispose of the bottle and the sealant liquid properly. Havethe sealing fluid and the cylinder disposed of in compliancewith national and local regulations.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
162

The bottle contains ethylene glycol and latex: it may
cause an allergic reaction. It is harmful if swallowed. It
is irritant for the eyes in case of contact. There could
be a reaction in the event of inhalation or contact. Avoid contact
with the eyes, skin and clothes. In the event of contact, rinse
immediately with plenty of water. If ingested, do not induce
vomiting. Rinse out your mouth, drink large quantities of waterand seek immediate medical attention. Keep out of the reachof children. The product must not be used by asthmatics. Do notinhale the vapours during insertion and suction. Call a doctor
immediately if allergic reactions are noted. Store the bottle in thespecific compartment, away from sources of heat. The sealantfluid has an expiry date. Replace the bottle containing out-ofdate sealant fluid.

INFLATION PROCEDURE
Wear the protective gloves provided with the kit.

❒ if after five minutes it is still impossible to reach at least 1.8 bar,disengage the compressor from the valve and power socket, thenmove the car forwards by approx. ten metres in order to distributethe sealing fluid inside the tyre evenly, then repeat the inflation
operation;

Proceed as follows:❒ engage the handbrake, unscrew the tyre valve cap, take out theflexible filler pipe A fig. 126 and tighten the ring nut B on the tyrevalve;❒ make sure that switch A fig. 127 for the compressor is in position 0(off), start the engine, insert the plug A fig. 128 into the powersocket on the central tunnel and switch on the compressor bybringing switch A fig. 127 to position I (on);❒ inflate the tyre to the pressure indicated in the “Wheels” paragraphin the “Technical specifications” section. In order to obtain a more
precise reading, check the pressure value on pressure gauge B
fig. 127 with the compressor off;

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 127

A0J0114SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 126

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0214

fig. 128

A0J0116163

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING❒ if you still cannot obtain a pressure of at least 1.8 bar within 5
minutes from the compressor switching on, do not drive off andcontact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services;❒ after driving for about 10 minutes, stop and check the tyre pressure
again; remember to put the handbrake on;❒ if a pressure value of at least 1.8 bar is detected, restore the correctpressure (with the engine running and the handbrake engaged),resume driving and drive with great care to Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
Apply the adhesive label where it can be easily seenby the driver as a reminder that the tyre has beentreated with the quick repair kit. Drive carefully,
particularly on bends. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Do not accelerateor brake suddenly.

IN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

If the pressure has fallen below 1.8 bar, do not drive
any further: the Fix&Go Automatic quick tyre repair kit
cannot guarantee the correct hold because the tyre is
too damaged. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
164

Inform the dealership that the tyre has been repaired
using the quick tyre repair kit. Give the leaflet to thetechnicians who will be handling the tyre that was
repaired using the quick repair kit.

CHECKING AND RESTORING TYRE
PRESSURE

REPLACING THE BOTTLE

The compressor can also be used to check and, if necessary, adjust thetyre pressure.
Release quick connector A fig. 129 and connect it directly to the valveof the tyre to be inflated.

Proceed as follows:❒ release connector A fig. 130 and disconnect tube B;❒ turn the bottle to be replaced anticlockwise and raise it;❒ fit the new bottle and turn it clockwise;❒ insert connector A and tube B in their housings.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 129

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0225

fig. 130

A0J0115165

CHANGING A BULBGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSGENERAL INSTRUCTIONS❒ Before changing a bulb check the contacts for oxidation;❒ blown bulbs must be replaced with others of the same type andpower;❒ after replacing a headlight bulb, always check its alignment;❒ when a light is not working, check that the corresponding fuse isintact before changing a bulb. For the location of fuses, refer tothe paragraph “Replacing fuses” in this section.
Halogen bulbs must be handled holding the metal part
only. Touching the transparent part of the bulb with yourfingers may reduce the intensity of the emitted light andeven reduce the lifespan of the bulb. In case of accidental contact, wipe
the bulb with a cloth moistened with alcohol and let the bulb dry.

Due to the high power supply voltage, gas discharge
bulbs (Bi-Xenon) should only be replaced by
specialised personnel: danger of death! Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.

IMPORTANT When the weather is cold or damp or after heavy rain or
washing, the surface of headlights or rear lights, may steam up and/or
form drops of condensation on the inside. This is a natural
phenomenon due to the difference in temperature and humidity
between the inside and the outside of the glass which does not indicate
a fault and does not compromise the normal operation of lighting
devices. The mist disappears quickly when the lights are turned on,
starting from the centre of the diffuser, extending progressively towards
the edges.

Modifications or repairs to the electric system that are
not carried out properly or do not take the systemtechnical specifications into account can cause
malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas which may
cause small fragments of glass to be projected
outwards if the bulb is broken.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
166

TYPES OF BULBS
The car has the following light bulbs:

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

Glass bulbs: (type A) they are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

SAFETY
Bayonet-type bulbs: (type B) to remove from its holder, press the bulb
and turn it anti-clockwise, then extract it.

STARTING AND
DRIVING
Tubular bulbs: (type C) release them from their contacts to remove.

IN AN
EMERGENCY
Halogen bulbs: (type D) to remove the bulb, release the clip holding thebulb in place.

Halogen bulbs: (type E) to remove the bulb, release the clip holding thebulb in place.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
167

BulbsGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

Type

Power

Re. Figure

W21/5W

5/21W

A

Rear side lights

LEDs

-

-

Dipped headlights

H7

55W

D

Main beam headlights

H7

55W

D

Main/Dipped beams (versions with Bi-Xenon headlights) (forversions/markets, where provided)

F

D1S

-

Front direction indicators

24W module

24W

B

Rear direction indicators

P21W

21W

B

Side direction indicators

WY5W

5W

A

Brake lights

LEDs

-

-

3rd brake light

LEDs

-

-

Number plate light

W5W

5W

A

Fog lights

H1

55W

E

Rear fog lights

P21W

21W

B

Reversing lights

P21W

21W

B

Front roof light

C10W

10W

C

Luggage compartment roof light

W5W

5W

A

Glove compartment light

C5W

5W

C

Puddle light

W5W

5W

A

Front side lights/Daytime running lights

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
168

REPLACING EXTERIOR BULBS

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTSFRONT LIGHT CLUSTERS
These contain the bulbs for the side lights/daytime running lights (DRL),
dipped beams, main beams and direction indicators. The bulbs arearranged as follows fig. 131:
A Side lights/daytime running lights and main beam headlights
B Dipped headlights
C Direction indicators

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ remove cover A fig. 131;❒ remove bulb holder C fig. 132, remove the bulb and replace it;❒ refit the bulb holder, making sure it is correctly secured;❒ refit cover A fig. 131.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSIDE LIGHTS/DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHTS (DRL)

STARTING AND
DRIVINGTo change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ remove cover A fig. 131;❒ remove bulb holder B fig. 132, remove the bulb and replace it;❒ refit bulb holder B, making sure it is correctly secured;❒ refit cover A fig. 131.

IN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 131

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0021

fig. 132

A0J0041169

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYDIPPED HEADLIGHTSDIRECTION INDICATORSWith incandescent bulbs
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ remove cover B fig. 131;❒ remove cover A fig. 133 protecting the bulb;❒ extract the bulb and replace it;❒ refit the bulb holder, making sure it is correctly secured;❒ refit cover B fig. 131.
With gas discharge bulbs (Bixenon)(for versions/markets, where provided)

Front
To replace the bulb, take wrench A fig. 134 (located in the document
holder), insert it in housing B and turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Extract the bulb and replace it.

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have thesebulbs replaced.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 133

170

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0040

fig. 134

A0J0018

Side
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ operate lens A fig. 135 in order to compress clip B, then pull the unit
outwards;❒ turn bulb holder C anticlockwise, remove the bulb and replace it;❒ refit bulb holder C in the lens, turning it clockwise;❒ refit the unit, making sure that internal clip B clicks into place.

REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS
To access the light cluster, move the luggage compartment side trim(see fig. 136). These contain the bulbs for the side lights, direction
indicators and brake lights.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSIDE LIGHTS/BRAKE LIGHTS
These are LED lights. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services toreplace these lights.

FOG LIGHTS(for versions/markets, where provided)

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGFor the replacement of these bulbs, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

IN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 135

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0042

fig. 136

A0J0043

171

REAR FOG LIGHT/REVERSING LIGHT
GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

To replace the rear fog light A fig. 137 or reversing light B fig. 137
bulbs, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
3rd BRAKE LIGHTSSAFETY

These are located in the tailgate and are LED bulbs. For replacement,
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
NUMBER PLATE LIGHTSSTARTING AND
DRIVINGTo replace the bulbs proceed as follows:❒ remove the number plate light units fig. 138;❒ turn the bulb holder B fig. 139 anticlockwise, extract the bulb C andreplace it;

IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 138

A0J0046

fig. 139

A0J0045SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 137

172

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0044❒ open the protection B fig. 143 and replace the bulb;❒ re-close the protection B on the lens;❒ refit the roof light A fig. 142 by inserting it in its correct position
firstly on one side and then pressing on the other until it clicks into
place.

REPLACING INTERIOR BULBSFRONT ROOF LIGHT
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ remove the roof light A fig. 140 working at the points indicated by
the arrows;❒ open the flap B fig. 141 and replace the bulbs C releasing themfrom the side contacts. Make sure that the new bulbs are correctly
secured between the contacts;❒ reclose the flap B fig. 141 and fix the roof light A fig. 140 in its
housing making sure that it is locked.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGLUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ROOF
LIGHT
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ open the luggage compartment and extract the roof light A fig. 142
working in the point shown by the arrow;

IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 141

A0J0121

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 140

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0120

fig. 142

A0J0119173

GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARTo change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ open the glove compartment and extract the light A fig. 144;
❒ replace bulb B, releasing it from the side contacts and making surethe new bulb is correctly fastened between the contacts.

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

COURTESY LIGHT(for versions/markets, where provided)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ lower the sun visor and remove courtesy light A fig. 145, applying
leverage at the point indicated by the arrow;❒ remove protection B, releasing it from tabs C, then replace bulb D
fig. 146 by pulling it outwards and releasing it from the side
contacts;❒ insert the new bulb, making sure that it is positioned correctly and issecured between the contacts;❒ refit protection B fig. 145, inserting it correctly between tabs C;❒ refit the roof light, inserting it first from side E fig. 146, then press on
the other side until you hear tab F click into place.

IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 143

A0J0118

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 144

174

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0122

fig. 145

A0J0123

PUDDLE LIGHT
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ open the door and remove the roof light by pushing on clip A fig.
147 with a screwdriver;❒ press the sides of protection B fig. 147 near the two fixing pins andreplace bulb C;❒ refit the protection, locking the two fixing pins;❒ refit the roof light, inserting it first from side D and then pressing on
the other side until you hear the clip click into place.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 146

A0J0124SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 147

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0125

175

REPLACING FUSESGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCY

Never replace a fuse with metal wires or anything else.

GENERAL INFORMATION
Fuses protect the electrical system: they intervene (blow) in the event ofa failure or improper intervention on the system.
When a device does not work, check the condition of its protective
fuse: the conductor element A fig. 148 must be intact.
If it is not, replace the blown fuse with another with the sameamperage (same colour).
B = undamaged fuse.
C = fuse with damaged filament.

If a general protection fuse (MAXI-FUSE, MEGA-FUSE,
MIDI-FUSE) blows, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.

Remove the key from the ignition switch and switch off
all loads before replacing a fuse.

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services should thefuse blow again.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

blows.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 148

176

Never replace a fuse with another with a higher amp
rating; DANGER OF FIRE.

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0048

Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services if a safetysystem (air bags, brakes), engine system (engine,
gearbox) or steering system general protection fuse

FUSE LOCATION

If you have to wash the engine compartment, take care notto aim the jet of water directly at the fuse box orwindscreen wiper motors.

Fuses are grouped together in three fuse boxes located in the engine
compartment, dashboard and luggage compartment.
Engine compartment fuse box
This is located next to the battery: to access the fuses fig. 150, undo
screws A fig. 149 and remove cover B.
The number identifying the electrical component corresponding to eachfuse is on the back of the cover.
After replacing the fuse, make sure you close cover B on the fuse box.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 149

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0126

fig. 150

A0J0127

177

Dashboard fuse box
GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

To access the fuses fig. 152, lower lid A fig. 151, grip cover B with one
hand in the area shown in the figure and remove it in the direction
shown by the arrow, in order to release first the inner retainers C andthen the tabs D.

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 151

178

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0334

fig. 152

A0J0205

Luggage compartment fuse box
To access the fuse box fig. 154 located on the left side of the luggage
compartment, open the relevant inspection lid (as illustrated in fig.
153).

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 153

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0264

fig. 154

A0J0175

179

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX
fig. 150
DEVICE PROTECTED

FUSE

AMPS

Heated windscreen

F08

15

Headlight washer pump

F09

20

Two-tone horns

F10

15

Main beam headlights

F14

15

Additional heater (PTC 1)/“Dynamic Suspension” control unit

F15

30

Air conditioning compressor

F19

7,5

Heated rear windscreen, defrosting system

F20

30

Electric fuel pump in tank

F21

15

Fog lights

F30

15

Passenger compartment interior solenoid valve

F83

40

Power socket on tunnel

F85

15

Passenger/driver side door mirror defroster, Demister on front jets, Heated windscreen relay
switch coil

F87

7,5

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
180

INSTRUMENT PANEL FUSE BOX
fig. 152
DEVICE PROTECTED

FUSE

AMPS

Right dipped beam headlight

F12 (*)

7,5

Headlight gas discharge system (right side)

F12 (*)

15

Left dipped beam headlight

F13

7,5 / 5 (*)

Headlight gas discharge system (left side)

F13

15 / 5 (*)

Headlight alignment adjustment system

F13

7,5

INT/A key exhaust relay switch coils on engine fuse box

F315

Front roof light, Luggage compartment roof light, Sun visor courtesy light, Door puddle lights,
Glove compartment light

F32 (*)

5

Radio, Blue&Me™ control unit, Climate control management control unit, Alarm siren control
unit, Volumetric system control unit, EOBD external diagnosis socket, Tyre pressure monitoring
control unit

F36

10

Instrument panel, Brake light switch, Gas discharge headlights management system

F37

5Door lock motor on doors, Safe Lock motor on doors, Tailgate unlocking motor

F38

15

Windscreen/rear window washer pump

F43

20

Electric window motor complete with control unit (driver side door)

F47

20

Electric window motor complete with control unit (passenger side door)

F48

20

(*) For versions/markets, where provided

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
181

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGDEVICE PROTECTED

FUSE

AMPS

Parking sensor control unit, Tyre pressure monitoring control unit, Rain/dusk sensor on interiorrear view mirror, Electrochromic sensor on interior rear view mirror, Seat belts fastened warning
light display on interior rear view mirror, Control panel lighting (central control panel, driverside control panel, control panel on steering wheel, Blue&Me™ control panel), Heater pad
activation switches on front seats, Alarm system volumetric sensor control unit, Electric sun roof
control unit, Navigation system socket on dashboard

F49

5

Clutch activation switch, Brake light switch, Relay switch coils on engine fuse box control unit,
Control system on internal climate control/heater unit, Blue&Me™ control unit, Radio setup,
Flow meter, Water in diesel sensor

F51

5

Instrument panel

F53

5

IN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
182

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT JUNCTION UNIT
fig. 154
DEVICE PROTECTED

FUSE

AMPS

Electric roof opening system

F1

20

Fuse setup

F2-

Luggage compartment power socket

F3

15

Bose HI-FI audio system amplifier control unit

F4

15

Bassbox subwoofer in spare wheel compartment

F5

10

Right and left front seat heater

F6

15

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
183

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSBATTERY RECHARGINGVERSIONS WITH Start&Stop SYSTEMIMPORTANT The battery recharging procedure is given as information
only. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to carry out thisoperation.

Charge the battery as follows:❒ disconnect the connector A fig. 155 (pressing the button B) from thesensor C monitoring the battery conditions, on the negative pole Dof the battery;❒ connect the positive cable (+) of the battery charger to the battery
positive pole (+);❒ connect the negative cable (+) of the battery charger to the post D of
the battery negative pole (-);
❒ turn on the battery charger;❒ when it is recharged, turn the charger off before disconnecting itfrom the battery;❒ reconnect the connector A to the sensor C of the battery.

IMPORTANT After turning the ignition key to STOP, wait at least 1
minute before disconnecting the battery power supply.
We recommend recharging the battery slowly for approximately 24hours at low amperage. Charging for a longer time may damage thebattery.
VERSIONS WITHOUT Start&Stop
SYSTEM(for versions/markets, where provided)
Charge the battery as follows:❒ disconnect the negative battery terminal;❒ connect the charger cables to the battery terminals, observing thepolarity;❒ turn on the battery charger;❒ when it is recharged, turn the charger off before disconnecting itfrom the battery;❒ reconnect the negative battery terminal.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
184

fig. 155

A0J0389

RAISING THE CAR

TOWING THE CAR

If you need to lift the car contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, whowill be equipped with a workshop lift.

The tow ring provided with the car is housed in the tool box in theboot.

IMPORTANT Be careful when positioning the arm of the lift for versions
with side skirts.

ATTACHING THE TOW HOOK
Release the plug A by pressing the lower part, take the tow hook B
from its housing in the tool support and tighten it securely on the front
threaded pin (fig. 156) or on the rear threaded pin (fig. 157).
Before beginning to tow, turn the ignition key to MAR
and then to STOP, without extracting it The steeringcolumn will automatically lock when the key isremoved and the wheels cannot be steered.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl

fig. 156

A0J0038185

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETY

Remember that whilst towing it is necessary to exert agreater force when steering and braking because thebrake servo and electro-mechanical power steering
will be inoperative. Do not use wires for towing. Do not jerk. Be
careful not to damage parts in contact with the car while towing.
When towing the vehicle, you must comply with all specific traffic
regulations and adopt an appropriate driving behaviour. Do notstart the engine while towing the car. Clean the threaded seatcarefully before fastening the hook. Make sure that the hook isfully fastened in the housing before towing the car.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN
EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 157

186

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0039

The front and rear tow hooks should be used only for
emergencies on the road. You are allowed to tow thevehicle for short distances using an appropriate devicein accordance with the highway code (a rigid bar), to move thevehicle on the road in readiness for towing or transport via a
breakdown vehicle. Tow hooks MUST NOT be used to tow
vehicles off the road or where there are obstacles and/or for
towing operations using cables or other non-rigid devices.
Respecting the above conditions, towing must take place with thetwo vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as
possible along the same centre line.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCESCHEDULED SERVICINGWARNING

Correct servicing is essential in guaranteeing a long life for the carunder the best conditions.
That’s why Alfa Romeo has prepared a series of checks and service
operations to be carried out every 30,000 kilometres (petrol versions)or every 35,000 kilometres (diesel versions).
Check the items on the Scheduled Servicing Plan (e.g. periodicallycheck level of liquids, tyre pressure, etc.) before 30,000/35,000 km
and between these services deadlines.
Scheduled Servicing is carried out at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
according to a set time schedule. If, during each operation, in addition
to the ones scheduled, the need arises for further replacements or
repairs, these may be carried out only with the explicit agreement of
the Customer. If your car is used frequently for towing, the interval
between one service operation and the next should be reduced.

At 2,000 km from the next service operation the display will show amessage.
The Scheduled Services intervals are set out by the Manufacturer.
Failure to comply with the schedule may invalidate the warranty.
It is advisable to inform Alfa Romeo Authorized Services of any small
faults without waiting for the next scheduled service.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
187

SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN
GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

188

PETROL VERSIONS
Thousands of miles

18

36

54

72

90

108

Thousands of kilometres

30

60

90

120

150

180

Months

24

48

72

96

120

144

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure, if required

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, passenger compartment, luggage compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.)

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of windscreen washer/wiper system

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check the position/wear of the windscreen/rear window wiper blades

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check condition and wear of front disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicator

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check rear disc brake pad condition and wear

●

●

●

●

●

●

Condition and status visual check: bodywork exterior, underbody protection, pipes and hoses(exhaust - fuel system - brakes), rubber elements (boots - sleeves - bushes etc.)

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check cleanliness of bonnet and boot locks, as well as cleanliness and lubrication of linkages

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (engine cooling, hydraulic brakes/clutch, screen washer,battery, etc.)

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check handbrake lever travel and adjust, if required

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check timing belt condition●●

Visually inspect conditions of the accessory drive belt(s)●●Check tension of accessory drive belts and adjust if necessary (versions with heater) (1.4 Petrol 8V
78 HP versions)
Check tappet clearance and adjust, if necessary (1.4 Petrol 8V
78 HP versions)
Alfawiki.nl

●

●
●

●

●

Thousands of miles

18

36

54

72

90

108

Thousands of kilometres

30

60

90

120

150

180

Months

24

48

72

96

120

144

Check exhaust emissions.

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check battery charge status and possibly recharge

●

●

●

●

●

●

Check engine management system operation (through the diagnosis socket)

●

●

●

●

●

●

Replace accessory drive belt(s)●Replacement of toothed timing belt (*)●●

Replace spark plugs (**)

●

●

●

Replace air cleaner cartridge (***)●

Change engine oil and oil filter (or every 24 months) (****)●●

Change pollen filter (or every 12 months)

●

●

●
●

●

Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)●●●

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

●
●

●
●

●

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR●

IN AN EMERGENCY●●●(*) Regardless of the distance covered, the timing belt must be changed every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, town driving, long periods of
idling) or at least every 5 years.
(**) For 1.4 MultiAir and 1.4 Turbo MultiAir versions, in order to guarantee correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine, it is essential to observe thefollowing: only use spark plugs specifically certified for these engines; all spark plugs should be of the same type and brand (see the “Engine” paragraph in the"Technical Specifications" section); strictly comply with the replacement intervals in the Scheduled Servicing Plan; you are advised to contact Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services to have plugs replaced.
(***) For Turbo TwinAir versions, the air cleaner cartridge must be replaced every 30,000 km.
(****) If the vehicle has an annual mileage of less than 10,000 km, the engine oil and engine oil filter should be changed every 12 months.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
189

DIESEL VERSIONSGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXThousands of miles

21

42

63

84

105

Thousands of kilometres

35

70

105

140

175

Months

24

48

72

96

120

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure, if required

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, passenger compartment, luggage compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.)

●

●

●

●

●

Check operation of windscreen washer/wiper system

●

●

●

●

●

Check the position/wear of the windscreen/rear window wiper blades

●

●

●

●

●

Check condition and wear of front disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicator

●

●

●

●

●

Check rear disc brake pad condition and wear

●

●

●

●

●

Condition and status visual check: bodywork exterior, underbody protection, pipes and hoses(exhaust - fuel system - brakes), rubber elements (boots - sleeves - bushes etc.)

●

●

●

●

●

Check cleanliness of bonnet and boot locks, as well as cleanliness and lubrication of linkages

●

●

●

●

●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (engine cooling, hydraulic brakes/clutch, screen washer,battery, etc.)

●

●

●

●

●

Check handbrake lever travel and adjust, if required

●

●

●

●

●

Check exhaust fumes/emissions

●

●

●

●

●

●

Visually inspect conditions of the accessory drive belts
Check engine management system operation (through the diagnosis socket)

●

●

●

●

●

Check battery charge status and possibly recharge

●

●

●

●

●

●

Replace accessory drive belts

Alfawiki.nl
190●

Thousands of miles

21

42

63

84

105

Thousands of kilometres

35

70

105

140

175

Months

24

48

72

96

120

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR●

Replace toothed timing drive belt (excluding 1.3 JTDM-2 engine)(*)●

Replace fuel filter●

Replace air cleaner cartridge●

SAFETY●●●●

Replace engine oil and oil filter (or every 24 months) (**) (***)●

Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)●

Change pollen filter (or every 12 months)

●

●
●

●

●

(*) Regardless of the distance covered, the timing belt must be changed every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, town driving, long periods of
idling) or at least every 5 years.
(**) The engine oil and the oil filter must be changed when the instrument panel warning light comes on (see "Warning lights and messages" in "Getting to know yourcar" chapter) or in any case every 24 months.
(***) If the car is mainly used in towns and cities, change the engine oil and filter every 12 months.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
191

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSPERIODIC CHECKSHEAVY-DUTY USE OF THE CAR

Every 1,000 km or before long journeys, check and restore thefollowing if necessary:❒ engine coolant, brake fluid and windscreen washer fluid level;❒ tyre inflation pressure and condition;❒ operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators,
hazard warning lights, etc.);❒ operation of window washer/wiper system and positioning/wear ofwindscreen/rear window wiper blades
Check and top up, if required, the engine oil level every 3,000 km.

If you use the car mainly under one of the following conditions:❒ towing a trailer or caravan;❒ dusty roads;❒ short, repeated journeys (less than 7-8 km) at sub-zero outside
temperatures;❒ engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long
periods of idleness;
the following checks must be performed more frequently than indicatedin the Scheduled Servicing Plan:❒ check front disc brake pad conditions and wear;❒ check cleanliness of bonnet and boot locks, cleanliness andlubrication of linkage;❒ visually inspect conditions of: engine, gearbox, transmission, pipes
and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and rubber elements(boots - sleeves - bushes - etc.);❒ check battery charge and battery fluid level (electrolyte);❒ visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belts;❒ check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace oil filter;❒ check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter;❒ check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner.

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
192

CHECKING LEVELS
When topping up, take care not to mix up the various typesof fluids: they are not compatible with each other andcould seriously damage the car.

Be very careful when working in the engine
compartment when the engine is hot: you may getburned. Remember that the fan may start up if
the engine is hot: this could injure you. Make sure that scarves,ties and other loose fitting garments do not get caught up in
moving parts.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETY
Never smoke while working in the engine
compartment: gas and inflammable vapours may bepresent, with the risk of fire.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
193

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
194

fig. 158 - Turbo TwinAir versions

A0J0380

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 159 - 1.4 Petrol versions

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0300

195

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
196

fig. 160 - 1.4 MultiAir versions

A0J0258

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
fig. 161 - 1.4 Turbo MultiAir versions

A0J0283

197

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

198

fig. 162 - 1.3 JTDM-2 versions

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0286

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
fig. 163 - 1.6 JTDM versions

A0J0200

199

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

ENGINE OIL

Engine oil consumption

Check that the oil level is between the MIN and MAX references on thedipstick A.
If the oil level is near or under the MIN reference, add oil through thefiller B until it reaches the MAX reference.

The maximum engine oil consumption is approximately 400 grams
every 1,000 km. When the car is new, the engine needs to run in,
therefore the engine oil consumption can only be considered stabilised
after the first 5,000 - 6,000 km.

For 1.4 Petrol, 1.4 MultiAir, 1.4 Turbo MultiAir, 1.3
JTDM-2 and 1.6 JTDM versions
Take out the engine oil dipstick A, clean it with a lint-free cloth andreinsert it. Take it out again and check that the engine oil level isbetween the MIN and MAX references on the dipstick.
For Turbo TwinAir versions
The engine oil dipstick A is integral with the cap A. Unscrew the cap,clean the dipstick with a lint-free cloth, reinsert the dipstick and screw
the cap back on.
Unscrew the cap again and check that the engine oil level is between
the MIN and MAX marks on the dipstick.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
200

Do not add oil with specifications other than those of the oil
already in the engine.

The oil level must never exceed the MAX reference.

Services.

Used engine oil and oil filters contain substances which areharmful to the environment. We recommend having theoil and oil filter replaced by Alfa Romeo AuthorizedENGINE COOLANT
If the level is too low, unscrew reservoir cap C and add the fluid
described in the chapter "Technical Specifications".
PARAFLU UP anti-freeze is used in the engine coolingsystem. Use the same fluid as in the cooling system when
topping up. PARAFLU UP cannot be mixed with any othertype of fluid. If this accidentally occurs, do not start the engine under
any circumstances. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOWWASHER FLUID
If the level is too low, lift reservoir cap D and add the fluid described in
the chapter "Technical Specifications".
Do not travel if the windscreen washer reservoir isempty: using the windscreen washer is essential for
improving visibility. Some commercial windscreen
washer additives are flammable. The engine compartment
contains hot components which may set it on fire.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

The cooling system is pressurised. If necessary, only
replace the cap with another genuine one or theoperation of the system may be adversely affected. Do
not remove the reservoir cap when the engine is hot: you risk
scalding yourself.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
201

BRAKE FLUIDGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

Check that the fluid is at the maximum level. If the fluid level in thereservoir is too low, undo reservoir cap E and add the fluid describedin the chapter "Technical Specifications".

SAFETY

Prevent brake fluid, which is highly corrosive, from coming
into contact with painted parts. Should it happen,
immediately wash with water.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGAIR CLEANER/POLLENFILTER/DIESEL FILTER
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to replace the filters.

Brake fluid is poisonous and highly corrosive. In theevent of accidental contact, wash the parts
immediately with water and neutral soap, then rinse
with plenty of water. Consult a doctor immediately if you
swallow the fluid.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

The symbol on the container indicates a synthetic
brake fluid, distinguishing it from the mineral type.
Using a mineral-type fluid will damage the special
rubber seals of the braking system beyond repair.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
202

BATTERY
Battery F (see previous pages) does not require the electrolyte to betopped up with distilled water. A periodic check carried out at Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services is, however, necessary to check efficiency.
REPLACING THE BATTERY
If necessary, replace the battery with another genuine battery with thesame specifications. Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions
for maintenance.
USEFUL ADVICE FOR EXTENDING THE
LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY

The battery will also be more at risk of freezing (this can happen as
early as –10°C). Refer to “Storing the car” in “Starting and driving” if
the car is left parked for a long time.
If after having purchased your car you decide to add accessories
requiring permanent electrical power (alarm etc.) or accessories that
require large amounts of power, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement.
Battery liquid is poisonous and corrosive. Avoid
contact with the skin and the eyes. Keep naked flames
and sources of sparks away from the battery: risk of
explosion and fire.

To avoid draining your battery rapidly and maintain its efficiency overtime, carefully observe the following instructions:❒ when you park the car, ensure that the doors, bonnet and flaps areclosed correctly, to prevent any roof lights from remaining on inside
the passenger compartment;❒ switch off all roof lights inside the car: the car is however equippedwith a system which switches all internal lights off automatically;❒ do not keep accessories (e.g. sound system, hazard lights, etc.)
switched on for a long time when the engine is not running;❒ before performing any operation on the electrical system, disconnect
the negative battery pole;
IMPORTANT If the charge level remains under 50% for a long time, thebattery is damaged by sulphation, reducing its capacity andefficiency at start-up.

Using the battery with insufficient fluid irreparably
damages the battery and may cause an explosion.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
203

SAFETY

Incorrect installation of electric and electronic devices may
cause severe damage to your car. After purchasing yourcar, if you wish to install any accessories (anti-theft, radio
phone etc.), contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, who will suggest
the most appropriate devices for your vehicle and will, mostimportantly, advise you if a higher capacity battery needs to beinstalled.

STARTING AND
DRIVING

Batteries contain substances which are very dangerous forthe environment. For the replacement of the battery,contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

WHEELS AND TYRES
Before embarking on a long trip, and every two weeks, check the tyre
inflation pressure and space-saver wheel. Check the tyres when cold.
While driving the car, the pressure increases under standard
conditions: for the correct tyre inflation pressure, see "Wheels"paragraph in the "Technical specifications" chapter.
Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyre wear fig. 164:
A normal pressure: tread evenly worn;
B low pressure: tread particularly worn at the edges;
C high pressure: tread particularly worn in the centre.
The tyres must be replaced when the tread is less than 1.6 mm thick.

If the car will be unused for an extended period oftime in extremely cold weather conditions, remove thebattery and store it in a heated area to prevent itfrom freezing.

When performing any operation on the battery or nearit, always protect your eyes with special goggles.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
204

fig. 164

A0J0136

IMPORTANT
Take the following precautions to prevent damage to the tyres:❒ avoid braking suddenly, racing starts and violent impact against thecurb, potholes or other obstacles and driving for extended periods
on uneven road surfaces;❒ periodically check that the tyres have no cuts in the side wall,abnormal swelling or irregular tyre wear;❒ avoid travelling with the car overloaded. If you puncture a tyre, stop
immediately and replace it;❒ change the position of the tyres every 10-15 thousand kilometres,
keeping them on the same side of the car to avoid inverting thedirection of rotation;❒ tyres age even if they are not used much. Cracks in the tread and on
the sidewalls are a sign of ageing. Have the tyres checked by
specialised personnel if they have been fitted for longer than 6
years. Remember to check the space-saver wheel very carefully;❒ In the case of replacement, always fit new tyres, avoiding those of
dubious origin;❒ if a tyre is replaced, also replace the inflation valve.

Remember that the road holding qualities of your car
also depend on the correct inflation pressure of thetyres.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

If the pressure is too low the tyre overheats and can beseriously damaged.

SAFETY

Do not cross switch the tyres, moving them from theright of the car to the left and vice versa.

impaired.

Never submit alloy rims to repainting treatments
requiring the use of temperatures exceeding 150°C.
The mechanical properties of the wheels could be

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
205

WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOWGETTING TO KNOW WIPERYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

BLADES
We recommend replacing the blades once a year.
A few simple precautions can reduce the possibility of damage to theblades:❒ if the temperature falls below zero, make sure that ice has not frozen
the rubber against the glass. Use a de-icing product to release it if
required;❒ remove any snow from the window;❒ do not operate the windscreen/rear window wipers on dry glass.

Replacing the wiper blades
Proceed as follows:❒ raise the wiper arm, press tab A fig. 165 of the attachment spring
and remove the blade from the arm;
❒ fit the new blade by inserting the tab into the special slot in the arm.
Make sure that it is properly locked into place;❒ lower the windscreen wiper arm on the windscreen.
Do not operate the windscreen wiper with the blades liftedfrom the windscreen.

Driving with worn windscreen/rear window wiper
blades is a serious hazard, because visibility is reduced
in bad weather.

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
206

fig. 165

A0J0054

Lifting the wiper blades
When the wiper blades have to be lifted from the windscreen (i.e. in
the event of snow), proceed as follows:❒ turn the ignition key to the MAR position;❒ operate the lever to the right of the steering wheel to activate awindscreen wiper stroke (see paragraph "Window washing" inchapter "Getting to know your car");❒ turn the ignition key to the STOP position when the driver's sidewiper blade reaches the windscreen side pillar and lift thewindscreen wiper to the rest position;❒ bring the wiper blades back into contact with the windscreen before
activating the windscreen wiper.

Replacing the rear window wiper
blade
Proceed as follows:❒ raise cover A fig. 166, undo nut B and remove arm C;❒ correctly position the new arm, fully tighten nut B then lower coverA.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl

fig. 166

A0J0057207

SPRAY NOZZLESGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETY

Windscreen washer
The window washer jets are fixed fig. 167.
If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstly check that there is fluid in thereservoir: see “Checking fluid levels” in this section).
Then check that the nozzle holes are not clogged, if necessary using aneedle.

Check the correct operation and cleanliness of nozzles at regularintervals.

Rear Window Washer
STARTING AND
DRIVINGThe nozzle holder is on the rear window fig. 168.
The rear window washer jets are fixed.
HEADLIGHT WASHERS(for versions/markets, where provided)

IN AN EMERGENCY

They are located inside the front bumper fig. 169.
They are activated when the dipped beam and/or main beam
headlights are on and the windscreen washer is activated.

fig. 168

A0J0055

fig. 169

A0J0029SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 167

208

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0053

BODYWORKPRESERVING THE BODYWORKPROTECTION AGAINST ATMOSPHERIC
AGENTS
The car is equipped with the best available technological solutions toeffectively protect the bodywork against corrosion.
These are the most important:❒ painting products and systems which give the car resistance tocorrosion and abrasion❒ use of galvanised (or pretreated) steel sheets, with high resistance tocorrosion;❒ spraying of plastic parts, with a protective function in the more
exposed points: underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc;
❒ use of “open” boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets ofmoisture which could favour the formation of rust inside;❒ use of special films to protect against abrasion in exposed areas(e.g. rear wing, doors, etc.).
BODY AND UNDERBODY WARRANTY

Paint
Touch up abrasions and scratches immediately to prevent the formationof rust.
Maintenance of paintwork consists of washing the car: the frequency
depends on the conditions and environment where the car is used. For
example, it is advisable to wash the car more often in areas withhigh levels of atmospheric pollution or salted roads.
To correctly wash the car, follow these instruction:❒ remove the aerial from the roof when using a carwash;❒ if high pressure jets or cleaners are used to wash the car, maintain adistance of at least 40 cm from the bodywork to avoid damage oralteration. Bear in mind that a build up of water could cause
damage to the car in the long term.
❒ wash the body using a low pressure jet of water;❒ wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution over the bodywork,
frequently rinsing the sponge;❒ rinse well with water and dry with a jet of air or a chamois leather.

The car is covered by warranty against perforation due to corrosion of
any original element of the structure or body. For the general termsof this warranty, refer to the Warranty Booklet.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
209

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYDry the less visible parts (e.g. door frames, bonnet, headlight framesetc.) with special care, as water may stagnate more easily in theseareas. Do not wash the car after it has been left in the sun or with thebonnet hot: this may alter the shine of the paintwork.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in the same way as the rest of
the car.

Engine compartment
At the end of every winter, wash the engine compartment thoroughly,
taking care not to aim the jet of water directly at the electronic control
units or at the windscreen wiper motors. Have this operation
performed at a specialised workshop.

In order to preserve the aesthetic properties of thepaintwork, abrasive products and/or polishes should not
be used to clean the car.

IMPORTANT The washing should take place with the engine cold andthe ignition key in the STOP position. After washing, make sure that thevarious protective devices (e.g. rubber caps and guards) have notbeen removed or damaged.

IN AN EMERGENCYTECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXIMPORTANT Never use aromatic substances (e.g. petrol) or ketenes(e.g. acetone) for cleaning the plastic lenses of the front headlights.

Detergents pollute the environment. Only wash your car inareas equipped to collect and treat wastewater from thistype of activity.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

Front headlights
Use a soft, damp cloth soaked in water and detergent for washingcars.

IMPORTANT
Avoid parking under trees; the resin dropped by trees makes thepaintwork go opaque and increases the possibility of corrosion.
Bird droppings must be washed off immediately and thoroughly as theacid they contain is particularly aggressive.
Windows
Use specific detergents and clean cloths to prevent scratching oraltering the transparency.
IMPORTANT Wipe the inside surface of the rear window gently with acloth in the direction of the filaments to avoid damaging the heating
device.

Alfawiki.nl
210

INTERIORS
Periodically check for water puddles under the mats that could cause
the panels to rust.
Never use flammable products, such as petrol ether or
rectified petrol to clean the inside of the car. The
electrostatic charges which are generated by rubbing
during the cleaning operation may cause a fire.

Do not keep aerosol cans in the car: they might
explode. Aerosol cans must not be exposed to atemperature exceeding 50°C. When the car is exposed
to sunlight, the internal temperature can greatly exceed thisvalue.

SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacuum cleaner. It is advisable touse a moist brush on velvet upholstery. Rub the seats with a sponge
soaked in a solution of neutral detergent and water.

LEATHER SEATS(for versions/markets, where provided)
Remove the dry dirt with a buckskin or slightly damp cloth, without
exercising too much pressure. Remove liquid or oil stains using a dry
absorbent cloth, without rubbing. Then clean with a soft cloth orbuckskin cloth dampened with water and neutral soap. If the stain
persists, use specific products and observe the instructions carefully.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETY

IMPORTANT Never use alcohol. Make sure that the cleaning products
used contain no alcohol or alcohol derivatives, even in small quantities.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Clean interior plastic parts with a damp cloth (if possible made frommicrofibre), and a solution of water and neutral, non-abrasive
detergent. To clean oily or persistent stains, use specific products freefrom solvents and designed to maintain the original appearance
and colour of the components.
Remove any dust using a microfibre cloth, if necessary moistened withwater. The use of paper tissues is not recommended as these may
leave residues.
IMPORTANT Never use alcohol or petrol to clean the glass on the
instrument panel or other plastic parts.
LEATHER PARTS(for versions/markets, where provided)
Use only water and neutral soap to clean these parts. Never use
alcohol or alcohol-based products. Before using a specific product forcleaning interiors, make sure that it does not contain alcohol and/or
alcohol based substances.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
211

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIDENTIFICATION DATA

V.I.N. PLATE

The identification details of the car are:❒ V.I.N. plate;❒ Chassis marking;❒ Body paintwork identification plate;❒ Engine marking.

This is located on the left side of the rear luggage compartment floor
and bears the following data fig. 170:
B Type-approval number.
C Vehicle type identification code
D Chassis serial number.
E Maximum authorised weight of vehicle fully laden
F Maximum authorised weight of vehicle fully laden plus trailer.
G Maximum permitted weight on first (front) axle
H Maximum permitted weight on second (rear) axle
I Engine type.
L Bodywork version code.
M Spares number.
N Correct value of smoke coefficient (for diesel engines)

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 170

212

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0161CHASSIS MARKINGENGINE MARKINGThis is printed on the passenger compartment floor, near the front rightseat.
Slide flap A fig. 171 to access.
The marking includes:❒ vehicle type (ZAR 955000);❒ chassis serial number.

This is stamped on the cylinder block and gives the model and thechassis serial number.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYBODYWORK PAINT IDENTIFICATION
PLATE

STARTING AND
DRIVING

This is fitted to the inside of the tailgate and bears the following data
fig. 172:
A Paint manufacturer.
B Colour name.
C Fiat colour code.
D Respray and touch up code.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 171

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0140

fig. 172

A0J0138213

ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONSGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

Versions

Engine code

Turbo TwinAir

312A2000

1.4 petrol 8V 70 HP

955A9000

1.4 Petrol 8V 78 HP

350A1000

1.4 MultiAir

955A6000

1.4 Turbo MultiAir 135 HP

955A2000

1.4 Turbo MultiAir 135 HP (***)

955A2000

1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP Quadrifoglio Verde

940A2000

1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP Quadrifoglio Verde (***)

955A8000(*) 4-seater versions(**) 5-seater versions(***) For versions/markets, where provided

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
214

Body versions
955AXW1B 17 (*)
955AXW1B 17B (**)
955AXV1A 16 (*)
955AXV1A 16B (**)
955AXU1A 15 (*)
955AXU1A 15B (**)
955AXL1B 08 (*)
955AXL1B 08B(**)
955AXM1A 09 (*)
955AXM1A 09B (**)
955AXM1A 09C (*)
955AXM1A 09D (**)
955AXN1B 10 (*)
955AXN1B 10B (**)
955AXS1B 13 (*)
955AXS1B 13B (**)

Versions

Engine code

1.3 JTDM-2 85 HP

199B4000

1.3 JTDM-2 95 HP

199B1000

1.3 JTDM-2 95 HP (***)

199B1000

1.6 JTDM 115 HP (***)

955A4000

1.6 JTDM 120 HP (Euro 4)

955A3000

1.6 JTDM 120 HP (Euro 5)

955A3000(*) 4-seater versions(**) 5-seater versions(***) For versions/markets, where provided

Body versions
955AXT1A 14C (*)
955AXT1A 14D (**)

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

955AXP1A 11 (*)
955AXP1A 11B (**)

SAFETY955AXP1A 11C (*)
955AXP1A 11D (**)
955AXE1B 04L (*)
955AXHE1B 04M (**)

STARTING AND
DRIVING

955AXC1B 02 (*)
955AXC1B 02B (**)
955AXC1B 02G (*)

IN AN EMERGENCY

955AXC1B 02H (**)

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
215

ENGINE
GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSGENERAL INFORMATION

Turbo TwinAir

Type code

312A2000

Cycle

Otto

Number and arrangement of cylinders

2 in line

Piston diameter and travel (mm)80.5x86

Total displacement (cm³)

875Compression ratio

10
NATURAL

DYNAMIC

Maximum power (EEC) (kW)

57

62.5

Maximum power (EEC) (HP)7785

corresponding engine speed (rpm)

5500

5500

NATURAL

DYNAMICMax torque (EEC) (Nm)

110

145

Maximum torque (EEC) (kgm)

11.2

14.8

corresponding engine speed (rpm)

2500

2000

Spark plugs
Fuel

NGK LKR9CI-8
Unleaded petrol 95 RON or 98 RON (EN 228 specification)

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
216

GENERAL INFORMATION

1.4 petrol 8V 70 HP

1.4 Petrol 8V 78 HP

955A9000

350A1000

Cycle

Otto

Otto

Number and arrangement of cylinders

4 in line

4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm)72.0 x 80.4

72.0 x 80.4

Total displacement (cm³)

1368

1368

Compression ratio

11.1

11.1

Maximum power (EEC) (kW)51

57

Maximum power (EEC) (HP)70

78

corresponding engine speed (rpm)

6000

6000

Max torque (EEC) (Nm)

115

115

Maximum torque (EEC) (kgm)

11.7

11.7

corresponding engine speed (rpm)

3000

3000

Spark plugs

NGK ZKR7A-10 or Champion RA8MCX4NGK ZKR7AI-8

Fuel

Unleaded petrol 95 RON (Specification EN
228)

Unleaded petrol 95 RON or 98 RON(EN 228 specification)

Type code

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
217

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

GENERAL INFORMATION

1.4 MultiAir

1.4 Turbo MultiAir 135 HP

Type code

955A6000

955A2000

Cycle

Otto

Otto

Number and arrangement of cylinders

4 in line

4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm)72.0 x 80.4

72.0 x 80.4

Total displacement (cm³)

1368

1368

Compression ratio

10,8

9,8

Maximum power (EEC) (kW)77

99

Maximum power (EEC) (HP)

105

135

corresponding engine speed (rpm)

6500

5000
DYNAMIC

Maximum torque (EEC) (Nm)

130

180

206

Maximum torque (EEC) (kgm)

13,2

18,3

21

corresponding engine speed (rpm)

4000

1750

1750

Spark plugs
Fuel

NGK DCPR7E-N-10

NGK IKR9F8

Unleaded petrol 95 RON or 98 RON(EN 228 specification)

Unleaded petrol 95 RON or 98 RON(EN 228 specification)

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
218

NATURAL

GENERAL INFORMATION

1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP Quadrifoglio Verde

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

955A8000 (*)

Type code

940A2000

Cycle

Otto

Number and arrangement of cylinders

4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm)72.0 x 80.4

Total displacement (cm³)

1368

Compression ratio

9.8

Maximum power (EEC) (kW)120 (*) /125

Maximum power (EEC) (HP)

163 (*) /170

corresponding engine speed (rpm)5500 (*) /5500

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

NATURAL

DYNAMICMax torque (EEC) (Nm)

320

350

Maximum torque (EEC) (kgm)

32.5

35.6

corresponding engine speed (rpm)

1500

1750

Spark plugs
Fuel

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCENGK IKR9F8
Unleaded petrol 95 RON or 98 RON (EN 228 specification)

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS(*) For versions/markets, where provided

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
219

GENERAL INFORMATIONGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

1.3 JTDM-2 85 HP

1.3 JTDM-2 95 HP

199B4000

199B1000

Cycle

DieselDieselNumber and arrangement of cylinders

4 in line

4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm)69.6 x 82

69.6 x 82

Total displacement (cm³)

1248

1248

Compression ratio

16,8

16,8

Maximum power (EEC) (kW)62

70

Maximum power (EEC) (HP)8595

corresponding engine speed (rpm)

3500

4000

Type code

DYNAMICMax torque (EEC) (Nm)

200

180

200

Maximum torque (EEC) (kgm)

20,4

17,6

19,7

corresponding engine speed (rpm)

1500

1500

1500

Spark plugs
Fuel

–

–

Diesel for motor vehicles (EN 590 specification)

Diesel for motor vehicles (EN 590 specification)

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
220

NATURAL

GENERAL INFORMATION

1.6 JTDM 115 HP (*)

1.6 JTDM 120 HP

955A4000

955A3000

Cycle

DieselDieselNumber and arrangement of cylinders

4 in line

4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm)79.5 x 80.5

79.5 x 80.5

Total displacement (cm³)

1598

1598

Compression ratio

16,5

16,5

Maximum power (EEC) (kW)8588

Maximum power (EEC) (HP)

115

120

corresponding engine speed (rpm)

4000

3750

Type code

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

NATURAL

DYNAMICNATURAL

DYNAMICMax torque (EEC) (Nm)

260

300

280

320

Maximum torque (EEC) (kgm)

26,5

30,6

28,5

32,6

corresponding engine speed (rpm)

1500

1500

1500

1750

Spark plugs
Fuel

–

–

Diesel for motor vehicles (EN 590 specification)

Diesel for motor vehicles (EN 590 specification)(*) For versions/markets, where provided

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
221

FUEL SUPPLYGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

Versions

Fuel supply

Turbo TwinAir – 1.4 petrol

Timed, sequential Multipoint electronic injection with knock control

1.4 MultiAir – 1.4 Turbo MultiAir

Timed sequential electronic injection with knock control and variableintake valve actuation

1.3 JTDM-2 – 1.6 JTDM

Electronically controlled Common Rail MultiJet direct injection withturbo and intercooler

Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system's technicalspecifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
222

TRANSMISSION
Versions
1.4 Turbo MultiAir
1.3 JTDM-2

GearboxClutchDrive

Five forward gears and reverse
with synchromesh for forward
gear engagement

Self-adjusting pedal without idle
strokeFront

Turbo TwinAir

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETY

1.4 petrol
1.4 MultiAir
1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP
Quadrifoglio VerdeSix forward gears plus reverse
with synchronisers for forward
gear engagement

Self-adjusting pedal without idle
strokeFront

STARTING AND
DRIVING

1.6 JTDM

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
223

BRAKESGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

Versions

Front brakes

Rear brakes

Parking brakeSelf-ventilated discs

Disc

Controlled by hand lever, acting
on the rear brakes

Turbo TwinAir
1.4 petrol

SAFETY

1.4 MultiAir
1.4 Turbo MultiAir
1.3 JTDM-2

STARTING AND
DRIVING

1.6 JTDM

IMPORTANT Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes areapplied.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
224

SUSPENSION
Versions

Front

Rear

McPherson independent wheels with anti-roll bar

Interconnected wheels with torsion beam

Turbo TwinAir

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

1.4 petrol
1.4 MultiAir
1.4 Turbo MultiAir

SAFETY

1.3 JTDM-2
1.6 JTDM

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
225

STEERING SYSTEMGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

Versions

Turning circle (kerb to kerb)

Type

11.0 mRack and pinion with electric power steering

Turbo TwinAir
1.4 petrol

SAFETY

1.4 MultiAir
1.4 Turbo MultiAir
1.3 JTDM-2

STARTING AND
DRIVING

1.6 JTDM

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
226

WHEELS

Maximum speed index

RIMS AND TYRES
Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless radial carcass tyres. The vehicle
registration document also lists all type-approved tyres.
IMPORTANT If there are any discrepancies between the Owner
handbook and the registration document, take the information from thelatter.
For safe driving, the car must be fitted with tyres of the same make andtype on all wheels.
IMPORTANT Do not use tubes with tubeless tires.
SPACE-SAVER WHEEL
Pressed steel rim. Tubeless tyre.

Q up to 160 km/h
R up to 170 km/h
S up to 180 km/h
T up to 190 km/h
U up to 200 km/h
H up to 210 km/h
V up to 240 km/h
W up to 270 km/h
Y up to 300 km/h

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

Maximum speed index for snow tyres
QM + S up to 160 km/h
TM + S up to 190 km/h
HM + S up to 210 km/h

IN AN EMERGENCYREADING THE TYRE CODE
Example fig. 173: 195/55 R 16 91V
195 Rated width (S, distance in mm between sidewalls)
55 Height/width ratio (H/S) as a percentage
R Radial tyre
16 Rim diameter in inches (Ø)
91 Load rating (capacity)
V Maximum speed index

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl

fig. 173

A0J0139227

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

Load rating (capacity)

CORRECT READING OF THE RIM CODE

60 = 250 kg

76 = 400 kg

61 = 257 kg

77 = 412 kg

62 = 265 kg

78 = 425 kg

63 = 272 kg

79 = 437 kg

64 = 280 kg

80 = 450 kg

65 = 290 kg

81 = 462 kg

66 = 300 kg

82 = 475 kg

Example fig. 173: 6 J x 15 H2 ET 31.5
J rim drop centre outline (side projection where the tyre bead rests)(2).
15 rim fitting diameter in inches (corresponds to diameter of the tyre
to be mounted) (3 = Ø).
H2 shape and number of humps (circumference measurement whichkeeps the bead of tubeless tyres in position on the rim).
ET 31.5 wheel camber (distance between the disc/rim support plane
and the wheel rim centre line).

67 = 307 kg

83 = 487 kg

68 = 315 kg

84 = 500 kg

69 = 325 kg

85 = 515 kg

70 = 335 kg

86 = 530 kg

71 = 345 kg

87 = 545 kg

72 = 355 kg

88 = 560 kg

73 = 365 kg

89 = 580 kg

74 = 375 kg

90 = 600 kg

75 = 387 kg

91 = 615 kg

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
228

RIM PROTECTOR TYRESGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

DO NOT fit wheel hub caps when using integral hub
caps fixed (with springs) to the steel rim and after saletyres provided with Rim Protector (fig. 174). Use of
unsuitable tyres and wheel caps may cause sudden loss of tyrepressure.

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX
fig. 174

Alfawiki.nl
A0J0166229

RIMS AND TYRES PROVIDED AS STANDARD
GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETY

Versions

Turbo TwinAir

STARTING AND
DRIVING
1.4 Petrol
1.4MultiAir

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

Rims

Tyres provided

Snow tyres

6Jx15 ET 40

185/65 R15 88H

185/65 R15 88H (M+S)

7Jx17 ET 39

195/55 R16 87H

195/55 R16 87H (M+S)

7Jx17 ET 39

215/45 R17 87W (*)

215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

7 1/2 Jx18 ET 42

215/40 R18 89W XL (*)

215/40 R18 89H (M+S)

6Jx15 ET 40

185/65 R15 88V(**)

185/65 R15 88Q (M+S)

6Jx15 ET 40

185/65 R15 88H (***)

185/65 R15 88H (M+S)

7Jx16 ET 39

195/55 R16 87H

195/55 R16 87H (M+S)

7Jx17 ET 39

205/45 R17 88W XL (**)

205/45 R17 88H (M+S)

7Jx17 ET 39

215/45 R17 87W (*)

215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

7 1/2 Jx18 ET 42

215/40 R18 89W XL (*)

215/40 R18 89H (M+S)(*)Tyres which cannot be fitted with chains(**)For versions/markets, where provided(***)1.4 Petrol versions

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
230

Space-saver wheel
Rim - Tyre

135/70 R16

4B x 16 ET 15

135/70 R16

4B x 16 ET 15

Versions
1.4 Turbo
MultiAir 135
HP – 1.4 Turbo
MultiAir 170
HP Quadrifoglio Verde
1.4 Turbo
MultiAir 135
HP (**)

Rims

Tyres provided

Snow tyres

7Jx16 ET 39

195/55 R16 87V

195/55 R16 87H (M+S)

7Jx17 ET 39

205/45 R17 88W XL (**)

205/45 R17 88H (M+S)

7Jx17 ET 39

215/45 R17 87W (*)

215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

7 1/2 Jx18 ET 42

215/40 R18 89W XL (*)

215/40 R18 89H (M+S)

6Jx15 ET 40

185/65 R15 88V

185/65 R15 88Q (M+S)

7Jx16 ET 39

195/55 R16 87V

195/55 R16 87H (M+S)

7Jx17 ET 39

215/45 R17 87W (*)

215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

7 1/2 Jx18 ET 42

215/40 R18 89W XL (*)

215/40 R18 89H (M+S)(*)Tyres which cannot be fitted with chains

Space-saver wheel
Rim - Tyre

135/70 R16

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

4B x 16 ET 15

SAFETY

135/70 R16

4B x 16 ET 15

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY(**) For versions/markets, where provided

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
231

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETY

Versions

1.3 JTDM-2
1.6 JTDM

Rims

Tyres provided

Snow tyres

6Jx15 ET40

185/65 R15 88H (*****)

185/65 R15 88H (M+S)

7Jx16 ET 39

195/55 R16 87H

195/55 R16 87H (M+S)

7Jx17 ET 39

205/45 R17 88W XL (**)

205/45 R17 88H (M+S)

7Jx17 ET 39

215/45 R17 87W (****)

215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

7 1/2 Jx18 ET 42

STARTING AND
DRIVING
1.3 JTDM-2 (**)
1.6 JTDM (**)

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

215/40 R18 89W XL(****)

185/65 R15 88T

185/65 R15 88T (M+S)

7Jx16 ET 39

195/55 R16 87H

195/55 R16 87H (M+S)

7Jx17 ET 39

215/45 R17 87W (****)

215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

215/40 R18 89W XL(****)

Rim - Tyre

135/70 R16

4B x 16 ET 15

135/70 R16

4B x 16 ET 15

215/40 R18 89H (M+S)

6Jx15 ET 40

7 1/2 Jx18 ET 42

Space-saver wheel

215/40 R18 89H (M+S)(**)For versions/markets, where provided(****)Tyres which cannot be fitted with chains(*****)1.6 JTDM versions

On versions with 185/65 R15 88H, 195/55 R16 and 205/45 R17 tyres, reduced size snow chains can be used, with a maximum projection of 9mm beyond the tyre profile.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
232

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)
TYRES PROVIDED
VERSIONSMEASUREMENTMEDIUM LOADGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

FULL LOAD

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Turbo TwinAir

185/65 R15 88H
195/55 R16 87H
215/45 R17 87W
215/40 R18 89W XL

2,3
2,3
2,2
2,3

2,1
2,1
2,1
2,1

2,3
2,3
2,3
2,3

2,3
2,3
2,3
2,3

1.4 Petrol
1.4 MultiAir

185/65 R15 88T (*)
195/55 R16 87H
205/45 R17 88W XL (*)
215/45 R17 87W
215/40 R18 89W XL

2,3
2,3
2,3
2,2
2,3

2,1
2,1
2,1
2,1
2,1

2,3
2,3
2,3
2,3
2,3

2,3
2,3
2,3
2,3
2,3

1.4 Turbo MultiAir
135 HP
1.4 Turbo MultiAir
170 HP
Quadrifoglio Verde

185/65 R15 88V (*)
195/55 R16 87V
205/45 R17 88W XL (*)
215/45 R17 87W
215/40 R18 89W XL

2,3
2,3
2,4
2,3
2,4

2,1
2,1
2,2
2,1
2,2

2,5
2,5
2,8
2,6
2,7

2,3
2,3
2,5
2,3
2,4

1.3 JTDM-2

185/65 R15 88T (*)
195/55 R16 87H
205/45 R17 88W XL (*)
215/45 R17 87W
215/40 R18 89W XL

2,6
2,3
2,4
2,3
2,4

2,4
2,1
2,2
2,1
2,2

2,6
2,5
2,8
2,6
2,7

2,4
2,3
2,5
2,3
2,4

(*)For versions/markets, where provided

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
233

TYRES PROVIDEDGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

185/65 R15 88H
195/55 R16 87H
205/45 R17 88W XL (*)
215/45 R17 87W
215/40 R18 89W XL

1.6 JTDM

SAFETYSpace-saver wheel

2,3
2,3
2,6
2,4
2,5

2,1
2,1
2,2
2,2
2,2

135/70 R16

4,2(*)For versions/markets, where provided

Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed pressure when the tyres are warm. Check correct pressure on a cold tyre.
STARTING AND
DRIVING

With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.
When travelling at speeds over 160 km/h, inflate the tyres to the values specified for fully laden conditions.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
234

2,5
2,6
2,8
2,6
2,7

2,3
2,3
2,3
2,3
2,3

DIMENSIONSGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle equipped with its original tyres. Height is measured with car unladen.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT VOLUME Unladen capacity (V.D.A. standards): = 270 dm3

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

fig. 175

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

A0J0202

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

4063

904

2511

648

1446

1475(*)/
1483(**)

1720

1469(*)/
1475(**)(*)With 19 5/55 R16 tyres

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS(**)With 215/40 R18 tyres

Small variations in size are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
235

PERFORMANCEGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

Top speed (km/h)

Acceleration from 0-100km/h (secs)

Turbo TwinAir

174

12,6

1.4 petrol 8V 70 HP

160

14,0

1.4 petrol 8V 78 HP

165

13.0

1.4 MultiAir

187

10,7

1.4 Turbo MultiAir 135 HP

207

8,4

1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP Quadrifoglio Verde

219

7,5

1.3 JTDM-2 85 HP

174

12,9

1.3 JTDM-2 95 HP

180

11,6

1.6 JTDM

198

9,9

Versions

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
236

WEIGHTS
Weights (kg)

Turbo TwinAir

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

1.4 petrol

4-seater

5-seater

4-seater

5-seater

Weight empty (with all fluids, fuel tank 90% fulland without optional equipment):

1130

1130

1080

1080

Payload including the driver: (*)

480

560

480

560

– front axle:

950

950

850

850

– rear axle:

850

850

850

850

– total:

1610

1690

1560

1640

– trailer with brakes:

500

500

500

500

– trailer without brakes:

400

400

400

400

Maximum load on roof:

40

40

40

40

Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):

60

60

60

60

SAFETY

Maximum permitted loads (**)

Towable loads(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the effective payload with respect to the maximum permittedload.
(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
237

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

1.4 MultiAir

Weights (kg)

4-seater

5-seater

Weight empty (with all fluids, fuel tank 90% full and without optional equipment):

1090

1090

Payload including the driver: (*)

480

560

– front axle:

950

950

– rear axle:

850

850

- total:

1570

1650

– trailer with brakes:

500

500

– trailer without brakes:

400

400

Maximum load on roof:

40

40

Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):

60

60

Maximum permitted loads (**)

Towable loads(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the effective payload with respect to the maximum permittedload.
(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
238

Weights (kg)

1.4 Turbo MultiAir Quadrifoglio Verde
4-seater

5-seater

Weight empty (with all fluids, fuel tank 90% fulland without optional equipment):

1145

1145

Payload including the driver: (*)

480

560

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETY

Maximum permitted loads (**)– front axle:

950

950

– rear axle:

850

850

– total:

1625

1705

– trailer with brakes:

500

500

– trailer without brakes:

400

400

Maximum load on roof:

40

40

Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):

60

60

STARTING AND
DRIVING

Towable loads(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the effective payload with respect to the maximum permittedload.
(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
239

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

Weights (kg)1.3 JTDM-2

1.6 JTDM

4-seater

5-seater

4-seater

5-seater

Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank 90%
full and without optional equipment):

1150

1150

1205

1205

Payload including the driver: (*)

480

560

480

560

– front axle:

950

950

1000

1000

– rear axle:

850

850

850

850

– total:

1630

1710

1685

1765

– trailer with brakes:

1000

1000

1000

1000

– trailer without brakes:

400

400

400

400

Maximum load on roof:

40

40

40

40

Maximum load on ball (trailer with brakes):

60

60

60

60

Maximum permitted loads (**)

Towable loads

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the effective payload with respect to the maximum permittedload.
(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
240

REFUELLING
Turbo TwinAir

1.4 Petrol

Prescribed fuels andoriginal lubricants

litreskg

litreskg

Fuel tank

45

-

45

-

including a reserve of

5-7

-

5-7

-

Unleaded petrol not less than 95
RON (EN 228 specification)

4,6

Mixture of 50% demineralised
water and 50% PARAFLUUP

Engine cooling system (with climate
control)

5,4Engine sump

3,0

2,4

2,7

2,3

Engine sump and filter

3,5

2,6

2,9

2,5

Differential/gearbox casing

1,65

1,5

1,6

1,4

TUTELA TRANSMISSIONGEARFORCE

Hydraulic brake circuit with ABS
anti-lock device

0,53

0,5

0,53

0,5

TUTELA TOP 4

2,2 (4,5)

1,9 (4,0)

2,8 (4,6)

2,5 (4,1)

Windscreen/rear window/
headlight washer fluid reservoir (**)

5,3

5,2

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETY

fluid(*)UP(*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% and 40% demineralised water is recommended.
(**) Values in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers

SELENIA StAR P.E.

Mixture of water and TUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
241

1.4 MultiAir

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

litreskg

Fuel tank45-

including a reserve of

5-7-Engine cooling system (with climate control)

5,2

4,6

Engine sump

3,1

2,6

Engine sump and filter

3,4

2,9

Differential/gearbox casing

1,6

1,4

TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARFORCE

Hydraulic brake circuit with ABS anti-lock device

0,53

0,5

TUTELA TOP 4

Windscreen/rear window/headlight washer
fluid reservoir (**)

2,8 (4,6)

2,5 (4,1)(*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% UP and 40% demineralised water is recommended.
(**) Values in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
242

Recommended fuels and original
lubricantsUnleaded petrol not less than 95 RON (EN228 specification)
Mixture of 50% demineralised water and
50% PARAFLUUP fluid (*)
SELENIA StAR P.E.

Mixture of water and TUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35

1.4 Turbo MultiAir

1.3 JTDM-2

Prescribed fuels andoriginal lubricants

litreskg

litreskg

Fuel tank

45

-

45

-

including a reserve of

5-7

-

5-7

-

Engine cooling system (with climate
control)

6,0

5,3

7,2

6,4

Engine sump

3,1

2,6

3,0

2,5

Engine sump and filter

3,5

3,0

3,2

2,7

Differential/gearbox casing

1,87

1,6

1,8

1,5

TUTELA TRANSMISSIONGEARFORCE

Hydraulic brake circuit with ABS
anti-lock device

0,53

0,5

0,53

0,5

TUTELA TOP 4

2,2 (4,5)

1,9 (4,0)3,0 (6,0)

2,8 (5,6)

Windscreen/rear window/
headlight washer fluid reservoir (**)

Unleaded petrol not less than 95
RON (EN 228 specification)(1.4 Turbo MultiAir versions)
Diesel for motor vehicles(EN590 specification)(1.3JTDM-2 versions)
Mixture of 50% demineralised
water and 50% PARAFLUUP
fluid(*)(*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% UP and 40% demineralised water is recommended.
(**) Values in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers

SELENIA StAR P.E. (1.4 Turbo
MultiAir versions)
SELENIA WR P.E. (1.3 JTDM-2
versions)

Mixture of water and TUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
243

1.6 JTDMGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

litreskg

Fuel tank45-

including a reserve of

5-7-Engine cooling system (with climate control)

5,7

5,0

Engine sump

4,3

3,6

Engine sump and filter

4,6

3,9

Gearbox casing/differential

1,87

1,6

TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARFORCE

Hydraulic brake circuit with ABS anti-lock device

0,53

0,5

TUTELA TOP 4

Windscreen/rear window/headlight washer fluid
reservoir (**)

3,0 (6,0)

2,8 (5,6)(*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% UP and 40% demineralised water is recommended.
(**) Values in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
244

Prescribed fuels and original
lubricantsDiesel for motor vehicles (EN 590 specification)
Mixture of 50% demineralised water and
50% PARAFLUUP fluid (*)
SELENIA WR P.E.

Mixture of water and TUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTSGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS
Use

Fluid and lubricant features for a correct use of
the car

Genuine fluids andlubricants

Lubricants for petrolengines

SAE 5W-40, ACEA C3 grade totally synthetic lubricant.
FIAT Classification 9.55535-S2

SELENIA StAR P.E.
Contractual Technical
Reference no. F603.D08

According to Scheduled
Servicing Plan

Diesel engine lubricants

SAE 5W-30 grade totally synthetic lubricant.
FIAT Classification 9.55535-S1

SELENIA WR P.E.
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F510.D07

According to Scheduled
Servicing Plan

Replacement interval

For diesel engines, in the event of an emergency in which the original products are not available, lubricants with at least ACEA C2 performance
are acceptable. In this case optimum engine performance is not guaranteed and the lubricants should be replaced with Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services recommended products as soon as possible.
The use of products with specifications below ACEA C3 (for petrol engines) and ACEA C2 (for diesel engines) could cause damage to the engine
that is not covered by the warranty.
For petrol versions with MultiAir system, the use of lubricants with features below ACEA C3 and SAE grade other than 5W-40 could cause
damage to the engine, not covered by the warranty.

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
245

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYUse

Lubricants andgreases for drive
transmission system

STARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY

Brake fluid

Fluid and lubricant features for a correct use of
the car

Genuine fluids andlubricantsApplications

SAE 75W grade synthetic lubricant.
FIAT Classification 9.55550-MZ6.

TUTELA TRANSMISSIONGEARFORCE
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F002.F10

Gearboxes and differentials(mechanical)

Molybdenum disulphide grease, for use at hightemperatures. NL.G.I. 1-2 consistency
FIAT 9.55580 Classification

TUTELA ALL STAR
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F702.G07

Wheel side constant velocity
jointsGrease for constant velocity joints with low friction
coefficient. NL.GI. 0-1 consistency
FIAT 9.55580 Classification

TUTELA STAR 700
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F701.C07

Differential side constantvelocity joints

Synthetic fluid for brake and clutch systems. Exceeds
specifications: FMVSS no. 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE
J1704,FIAT 9.55597 Classification

TUTELA TOP 4
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F001.A93

Brake and clutch hydrauliccontrols

SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
246

Use

Fluid and lubricant features for a correct use of
the car

Genuine fluids andlubricantsProtective agent forradiators

Red protective agent with antifreeze action, based on
inhibited monoethylene glycol with organic formula. Exceeds
CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications.
FIAT 9.55523 Classification

Diesel fuel additive

TUTELA DIESEL ART
Antifreeze additive for diesel, with protective action for diesel
Contractual Technicalengines.
Reference No. F601.L06

Washer fluid forwindscreen/rear
window/headlamps

Mixture of alcohol, water and surfactants CUNA NC 956-11
FIAT 9.55522 Classification

Applications

UP

PARAFLU (*)
Contractual Technical
Reference No. F101.M01

TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35Contractual Technical
Reference No. F201.D02(*)IMPORTANT Do not use fluids with different specifications for topping up or mixing.
(**)For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% PARAFLUUP and 40% distilled water is recommended.

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

Mixture: 50% water and
50% PARAFLUUP (**)
To be mixed with the diesel(25 cc per 10 litres)
To be used diluted orundiluted inwindscreen/rear window
washer/wiper systems

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
247

FUEL CONSUMPTIONGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVING

The fuel consumption figures given in the table below are determined on the basis of the type-approval tests laid down by specific European
Directives.
The procedures below are followed for measuring consumption:❒ urban cycle: cold starting followed by driving that simulates urban use of the car;❒ extra-urban cycle: frequent accelerating in all gears, simulating extra-urban use of the car: speed varies between 0 and 120 km/h;❒ combined fuel consumption: calculated with a weighting of approximately 37% of the urban cycle and 63% of the extra-urban cycle.
IMPORTANT The type of route, traffic conditions, weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the car, trim level/equipment/accessories,
use of the climate control, car load, presence of roof racks and other situations that adversely affect the aerodynamics or wind resistance lead todifferent fuel consumption figures than those measured.
FUEL CONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO THE CURRENT EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE(litres/100 km)

IN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

Versions

Urban

Extra-urban

Combined

Turbo TwinAir

4,9

3,8

4,2

1.4 petrol 8V 70 HP

7.6

4.7

5.8

1.4 petrol 8V 78 HP

7.3

4.6

5.6

1.4 MultiAir

7,5

4,7

5,7

1.4 Turbo MultiAir 135 HP

7,4

4,5

5,6

1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP
Quadrifoglio Verde

8,1

4,8

6,0

4,6

3,0

3,6

1.3 JTDM-2 85 HP

INDEX

Alfawiki.nl
248

Versions

Urban

Extra-urban

Combined

1.3 JTDM-2 95 HP

5,5

3,6

4,3

1.3 JTDM-2 95 HP (**)

5,1

3,3

4,0

1.6 JTDM

5,3

3,8

4,4

(**)For versions/markets, where provided

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
249

CO2 EMISSIONSGETTING TO KNOWYOUR CAR

The CO2 emission levels given in the following tables refer to combined consumption.
Versions

SAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCE

CO2 emissions according to the current European directive(g/km)

Turbo TwinAir

98

1.4 petrol 8V 70 HP

134

1.4 petrol 8V 78 HP

130

1.4 MultiAir

134

1.4 Turbo MultiAir 135 HP

129

1.4 Turbo MultiAir 135 HP (**)

128

1.4 Turbo MultiAir 170 HP Quadrifoglio Verde139

1.3 JTDM-2 85 HP

95

1.3 JTDM-2 95 HP

112

1.3 JTDM-2 95 HP (**)

104

1.6 JTD M

114(**) For versions/markets, where provided

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
250

PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING THE VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITSLIFEFor years, Alfa Romeo has pursued a global commitment to protect and respect the environment by continually improving its production processes
and developing increasingly eco-compatible products. To ensure its customers the best possible service in compliance with environmental standards
and in response to obligations arising out of European Directive 2000/53/EC on end of life vehicles, Alfa Romeo offers its customers the chance
to hand back their vehicles (*) at the end of their life cycle at no additional cost.
The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over the last keeper or owner should not incur any expenses as a result of it
having a zero or negative market value. In particular, in almost all European Union countries, until 1st January 2007, vehicles registered after 1st
July 2002 will be collected free of charge, whilst from 2007 collection will be free of charge irrespective of the year of registration as long as
the vehicle contains its basic components (in particular, the engine and bodywork) and has no additional waste.
To hand your vehicle over at the end of its life without extra cost, contact one of our dealerships or an Alfa Romeo authorised collection andscrapping centre. These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high-quality service for the collection, treatment and recycling of vehicles attheir end of life, respecting the surrounding environment.
You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from an Alfa Romeo Dealership or by calling the freephone
number 00800 2532 0000 or on the Alfa Romeo website.
(*) Vehicle for transporting passengers with a maximum of nine seats and a total permitted weight of 3.5 t

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONSINDEXAlfawiki.nl
251

DASHBOARD

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONSThe presence and position of controls, instruments and gauges may vary according to different versions.

fig. 1

A0J0393

1. Air vent for side windows – 2. Adjustable air vent – 3. Passenger front air bag – 4. Sound system (for versions/markets, where provided) – 5.
Adjustable air vents – 6. Hazard warning lights, door lock/unlock button – 7. Exterior lighting control lever – 8. Instrument panel – 9. Windscreen
wiper/rearscreen wiper/trip computer control lever – 10. Control panel – 11. Fuse box access flap – 12. Ignition device – 13. Driver front air bag –14. Driver front knee air bag (for versions/markets, where provided) – 15. Cruise Control (for versions/markets, where provided) – 16. “Alfa DNA”
system – 17. Gear lever – 18. Heating/ventilation/climate control system controls – 19. Glove compartment

Alfawiki.nl
252

CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS

fig. 2

A0J0292

A. Speedometer (speed indicator) B. Multifunctional display C. Rev counter D. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light E. Engine coolant
temperature gauge and excessive temperature warning light

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONSVERSIONS WITH MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY

Warning lights supplied in diesel versions only. On diesel versions the rpm gauge end of scale is set at 6000 rpm
WARNING Instrument background colour and type may vary according to the version.

Alfawiki.nl
253

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONSVERSIONS WITH RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY

fig. 3

A0J0293

A. Speedometer (speed indicator) B. Reconfigurable multifunctional display C. Rev counter D. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light E. Engine
coolant temperature gauge and excessive temperature warning light

Warning lights supplied in diesel versions only. On diesel versions the rpm gauge end of scale is set at 6000 rpm
WARNING Instrument background colour and type may vary according to the version.

Alfawiki.nl
254

INTRODUCTION ........................................................................... 257
ADVICE ..................................................................................... 257
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS................................................... 259
BASIC LEVEL SYSTEM.................................................................. 259
MEDIUM LEVEL SYSTEM.............................................................. 259
BOSE HI-FI LEVEL SYSTEM........................................................... 260
QUICK GUIDE............................................................................... 261
GENERAL FUNCTIONS............................................................... 262
RADIO FUNCTIONS ................................................................... 263
CD FUNCTIONS......................................................................... 263
Media Player FUNCTIONS (only with Blue&Me™) .................... 264

TRAFFIC INFORMATION function ................................................ 274
REGIONAL MODE function ........................................................ 276
MP3 DISPLAY function ................................................................ 276
SPEED VOLUME function ............................................................ 277
RADIO ON VOLUME function ..................................................... 277
SPEECH VOLUME function .......................................................... 278
AUX OFFSET function ................................................................. 278
RADIO OFF function .................................................................. 279
SYSTEM RESET function ............................................................... 279
TELEPHONE SETUP ..................................................................... 279
ANTI-THEFT PROTECTION........................................................... 279
RADIO (TUNER) ............................................................................ 281
INTRODUCTION......................................................................... 281
FREQUENCY BAND SELECTION.................................................. 281
PRESET BUTTONS....................................................................... 281
STORING THE LAST STATION LISTENED TO.................................. 282
AUTOMATIC TUNING................................................................. 282
MANUAL TUNING ..................................................................... 282
AUTOSTORE FUNCTION ........................................................... 283
EMERGENCY ALARM RECEPTION............................................... 284
EON FUNCTION (Enhanced Other Network)................................ 284
STEREOPHONIC BROADCASTERS............................................... 285
CD PLAYER ................................................................................... 285
INTRODUCTION......................................................................... 285
SELECTING THE CD PLAYER ........................................................ 285
LOADING/EJECTING A CD ........................................................ 286
DISPLAY INFORMATION ............................................................. 287
TRACK SELECTION (forward/back) ............................................. 287
TRACK FAST FORWARD/REWIND............................................... 287
PAUSE FUNCTION...................................................................... 287

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS ...................................................... 265
GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................. 267
FUNCTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS ................................................. 269
SWITCHING ON THE RADIO ...................................................... 269
SWITCHING OFF THE RADIO...................................................... 269
SELECTING THE RADIO FUNCTIONS........................................... 269
SELECTING CD FUNCTION......................................................... 269
AUDIO SOURCE MEMORY FUNCTION ....................................... 270
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT .............................................................. 270
MUTE/PAUSE FUNCTION (zeroing the volume) ........................... 270
AUDIO SETTINGS....................................................................... 270
TONE ADJUSTMENT (bass/treble) ............................................... 271
BALANCE ADJUSTMENT............................................................. 271
FADER ADJUSTMENT.................................................................. 272
LOUDNESS FUNCTION .............................................................. 272
PRESET/USER/CLASSIC/ROCK/JAZZ FUNCTIONS...................... 272
USER EQ SETTINGS FUNCTION ................................................. 273
MENU ....................................................................................... 273
Alfawiki.nl
AF SWITCHING function ............................................................ 274

SOUND-SYSTEMTABLE OF CONTENTS

255

TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................................... 292
GENERAL................................................................................... 292
CD PLAYER................................................................................. 292
MP3 FILE READING .................................................................... 292

SOUND-SYSTEM

MP3 CD PLAYER............................................................................ 288
INTRODUCTION......................................................................... 288
MP3 MODE................................................................................ 288
SELECTING MP3 SESSIONS ON HYBRID DISCS ........................... 289
DISPLAY INFORMATION ............................................................. 289
SELECTING NEXT/PREVIOUS FOLDER ......................................... 290
STRUCTURE OF THE FOLDERS ..................................................... 290
AUX (only with the Blue&Me™ system) ........................................ 291
INTRODUCTION......................................................................... 291
AUX MODE................................................................................ 291

Alfawiki.nl
256

INTRODUCTION

Reception conditions

The radio has been designed according to the passenger
compartment's specific characteristics and with a personalised
design that complements the style of the dashboard.
The instructions for use are given below. We recommend that you
read them carefully.

Reception conditions change constantly while driving. Reception
may be interfered with by the presence of mountains, buildings orbridges, or when you are far away from the broadcaster.

Road safety
Familiarise yourself with the various car radio functions (e.g.
storing radio stations), before starting to drive.

If the volume is too loud this could be
dangerous for the driver and for passengers
when driving in traffic. Always adjust thevolume so that you can still hear background noises.

SOUND-SYSTEM

ADVICENote
The volume may be increased when receiving traffic alerts andnews.

Alfawiki.nl
257

Maintenance and care
Only clean the cover with a soft, anti-static cloth. Cleaning andpolishing products may damage the surface.
CD

SOUND-SYSTEM

Dirt, scratches or any distortions on CDs may cause skipping
during playback and poor sound quality. Follow these tips for
optimum playback conditions:❒ only use CDs with the following mark:❒ do not expose CDs to direct sunlight, high temperatures ormoisture for long periods;❒ do not stick labels on the surface of the CD and do not write on
the recorded surface using pens or pencils;❒ Never use CDs that are very scratched, cracked, distorted, etc.
Their use could cause damage to the player or make it
malfunction;❒ to achieve the best quality audio reproduction we recommend
the use of original CD media. Correct operation is notguaranteed when CD-R/RW media are used that were notcorrectly burnt and/or with a maximum capacity above 650
Mb;❒ clean every CD thoroughly removing any fingerprints or dust
using a soft cloth. Hold CDs by the circumference and clean
them from the centre towards the edge;❒ never use chemical products (e.g. antistatic or thinner spraycans) for cleaning as they could damage the surface of the CDs;
❒ after listening to them place CDs back in their cases to avoid
them being damaged;

Alfawiki.nl
258

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Maximum power: 4x40 W
BASIC LEVEL SYSTEM
Standard level audio
Front speakers❒ 2 × tweeters, 38 mm;❒ 2 × mid-woofer speakers, 165 mm.
Rear speakers❒ 2 × full-range speakers, 165 mm.
Medium level radio (dual tuner)
MEDIUM LEVEL SYSTEM❒ The CD player is able to read most of the compression systems
currently on the market (e.g.:LAME, BLADE, XING,FRAUNHOFER) but as these systems are continually evolving,playback of all compression formats is not guaranteed.

Medium level audio
Front speakers❒ 2 × tweeters, 38 mm;❒ 2 × mid-woofer speakers, 165 mm.
Rear speakers❒ 2 × tweeters, 38 mm;❒ 2 × mid-woofer speakers, 165 mm.
High level radio (dual tuner and dual aerial).

SOUND-SYSTEM❒ do not use commercially available protective sheets for CDs or
discs with stabilisers as they could get stuck in the internalmechanism and damage the disc;❒ if a copy-protected CD is used, it may take a few seconds before
the system starts to play it. The CD player is not guaranteed toplay all copy-protected discs. The presence of copy protection isoften indicated in small letters or may be difficult to read on the
cover of the CD; it may say something like, for example, “COPY
CONTROL”, “COPY PROTECTED”, “THIS CD CANNOT BE
PLAYED ON A PC/MAC” or may be identified through the useof symbols, such as, for example:

Alfawiki.nl259

SOUND-SYSTEMBOSE HI-FI LEVEL SYSTEM(for versions/markets, where provided)
HI-FI level audio
Front speakers❒ 2 × tweeters, 38 mm;❒ 2 × mid-woofer speakers,
Rear speakers❒ 2 × tweeters, 38 mm;❒ 2 × mid-woofer speakers,❒ 1 × 8-channel amplifier;❒ 1 × bass box.

165 mm;

165 mm;The Bose HI-FI audio system has been carefully designed to provide
the best acoustic performance and reproduce sound like a live
concert in all areas of the passenger compartment.
The system faithfully reproduces crystalline treble tones andprovides full and rich bass tones that make the loudness function
superfluous.
The complete range of sound is reproduced throughout the entire
passenger compartment so that the occupants are enveloped withthe feeling of space experienced when listening to live music.
The components used have been patented and make use of themost sophisticated technology whilst at the same time being easy touse by even the most inexperienced people.

High level radio (dual tuner and dual aerial).

Alfawiki.nl260

SOUND-SYSTEMQUICK GUIDE

fig. 1

A0J0001

Alfawiki.nl
261

GENERAL FUNCTIONS
ButtonBrief button press

Switching off

Brief button press

Volume adjustment

LH/RH knob rotation

FM AS

Selection of radio source FM1, FM2, FM Autostore

Brief cyclical button press

AM

MW1, MW2 radio source selection

Brief cyclical button press

MEDIA

CD/Media Player (only with Blue&Me™) / AUX (onlywith Blue&Me™, for versions/markets, where provided)source selection

Brief cyclical button press

Volume activation/deactivation (MUTE/PAUSE)

Brief button press

AUDIO

Audio adjustments: low tones (BASS), high tones (TREBLE),
RH/LH balance (BALANCE), front/rear balance (FADER)

Menu activation: brief button press
Selection of adjustment type: pressing buttons
Adjustment of values: pressing buttons or

or

MENU

Advanced functions adjustment

Menu activation: brief button press
Selection of adjustment type: pressing buttons
Adjustment of values: pressing buttons oror

Alfawiki.nl
262

Mode

Switching on
ON/OFF

SOUND-SYSTEM

Functions

123456

Functions

ModeRadio station search:- Automatic search- Manual search

Automatic search: press buttons or (hold down forfast forward)
Manual search: press buttons or (hold down for fast
forward)Store current radio station

Long button press for memory preset 1 to 6 respectively

Stored station recall

Brief button press for memory preset 1 to 6 respectively

CD FUNCTIONS
ButtonFunctionsMode

CD ejection

Brief button press

Play previous/next track

Pressingorbuttons briefly

CD track fast forward/rewind

Pressingorbuttons briefly

Playing previous/next folder (for CD-MP3)

Pressingorbuttons briefly

SOUND-SYSTEM

RADIO FUNCTIONS
ButtonAlfawiki.nl
263

Media Player FUNCTIONS (only with Blue&Me™)
ButtonFunctions
Brief button press

Play previous/next track

Brief button press

SOUND-SYSTEM

Select previous/next folder/artist/genre/album dependingon the active selection mode

Alfawiki.nl
264

Mode

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS

fig. 2

A0J0052

SOUND-SYSTEM(for versions/markets, where provided)

Alfawiki.nl
265

SOUND-SYSTEM

ButtonFunctions
AudioMute on/off (Radio mode) or Pause function in MP3 or Media
Player mode (only with Blue&Me™)

Brief button press+

Volume increase

Button press–

Volume decrease

Button press

SRC

Selection of Radio frequency range (FM1, FM2, FMT, FMA, MW)
and audio sources: Radio, MP3 or Media Player (only with
Blue&Me™) /AUX (only with Blue&Me™) (forversions/markets, where provided)

Button press

Radio: recall stored stations (from 1 to 6) CD/CD MP3: select next
track

Button press

Radio: recall stored stations (from 6 to 1) CD/CD MP3: selectprevious track

Button press

NOTE Starting from the FM or AM source set on the radio (e.g. FM1 or MW1), if you cycle through the audio sources using the SRC
button among the steering wheel controls (stopping on a source other than radio) when the radio source is selected (FM or AM) using the
buttons on the radio panel, the radio always switches to the last radio source (FMA or MW2).

Alfawiki.nl
266

Mode

The radio offers the following functions:Radio section❒ PLL tuning with FM/AM/MW frequency bands;❒ RDS (Radio Data System) with TA (traffic alerts) function - TP
(traffic programmes) - EON (Enhanced Other Network) - REG(regional programmes);❒ AF: search selection for alternative frequencies in RDS mode;❒ provision for emergency alarm;❒ automatic/manual tuning of stations;❒ FM Multipath detector;❒ manual storing of 30 stations: 18 on FM band (6 on FM1, 6 on
FM2, 6 on FMT), 12 on MW band (6 on MW1, 6 on MW2);❒ automatic memorization (AUTOSTORE function) of 6 stations in
the dedicated FM band;❒ SPEED VOLUME function (excluding versions with Bose Hi-Fi
system): speed-dependent automatic volume adjustment;❒ automatic Stereo/Mono selection.

CD section❒ Direct selection of the disc;❒ Track selection (forward/back);❒ Fast advance (forward/back) through tracks;❒ CD Display function: display of disc name and time elapsed
since the start of the track;❒ Playing of audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Multimedia CDs include data tracks in addition
to the audio tracks. Playing this type of CD cancause hissing at a volume that may jeopardise
road safety as well as causing damage to the final
stages and the speakers.

SOUND-SYSTEM

GENERAL INFORMATION

Alfawiki.nl
267

SOUND-SYSTEM

MP3 CD section❒ MP3-Info function (ID3-TAG);❒ Folder selection (previous/next);❒ Track selection (forward/back);❒ Fast advance (forward/back) through tracks;❒ MP3 Display function: display of name of folder, ID3-TAG
information, time elapsed since the start of the track, name of thefile);❒ Playing of audio or data CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs.

Media Player section (only with Blue&Me™)
For the Media Player functions see the Blue&Me™ supplement.
AUX section (only with Blue&Me™)(for versions/markets, where provided)❒ AUX source selection;❒ AUX Offset function: alignment of the portable device volume
with that of the other sources;❒ Portable player playback.

Audio section❒ Mute/Pause function;❒ Soft-Mute function;❒ Loudness function (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system);❒ 7-band graphic equaliser (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI
system);❒ Separate bass/treble adjustment;❒ Right/left channel balance.

Alfawiki.nl
268

FUNCTIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS

SELECTING THE RADIO FUNCTIONS

The radio switches on when the ON/OFF button is pressed briefly.
When the radio is turned on, the volume is limited to level 20 if it
was set to a higher value when previously used or to level 5 if it
was previously set to value 0 or to Mute/Pause. The previously set
value is maintained in all other cases.
When the radio is switched on with the key extracted from theignition, it switches off automatically after about 20 minutes. Afterthe radio has switched itself off automatically it can be switched on
for a further 20 minutes by pressing the ON/OFF button.

By pressing the FM AS button quickly and repeatedly, the following
audio sources can be selected cyclically:❒ TUNER (“FM1”, “FM2”, “FMA”).
By pressing the AM button briefly and repeatedly, the following
audio sources can be selected cyclically:❒ TUNER (“MW1”, “MW2”).
SELECTING CD FUNCTION
By pressing the MEDIA button briefly it is possible to select the CD
function.

SWITCHING OFF THE RADIO
Briefly press the ON/OFF button.

SOUND-SYSTEMSWITCHING ON THE RADIO

Alfawiki.nl
269

AUDIO SOURCE MEMORY FUNCTION

MUTE/PAUSE FUNCTION (zeroing the volume)

If another function (e.g. the radio) is selected whilst listening to aCD, playback is interrupted and is resumed from the same point
when returning to the CD source.
If another function is selected whilst listening to the radio, the last
station selected is tuned into when returning to Radio mode.

Press the button briefly to activate the Mute function. The volume
will gradually decrease and the words “RADIO Mute” (in radiomode) or “PAUSE” (in CD mode) will be displayed.
Press the button again to deactivate the Mute function. The
volume will gradually increase until it reaches the level set
previously.
When the volume level is changed using the dedicated controls, theMute function is deactivated and the volume is adjusted to the newlevel selected.
With the Mute function activated, it will be ignored when there isan incoming traffic alert (if the TA function is activated), or if an
emergency alarm is received. The function will be reactivated when
the alert is over.

SOUND-SYSTEMVOLUME ADJUSTMENT
To adjust the volume, turn the ON/OFF knob.
If the volume level is changed during the transmission of traffic
news, the new setting will only be maintained until the update isfinished.

Alfawiki.nl
270

AUDIO SETTINGSTONE ADJUSTMENT (bass/treble)

The functions in the audio menu differ according to the active
source: AM/FM/CD/Media Player (only with Blue&Me™) /AUX
(only with Blue&Me™) (for versions/markets, where provided).
Press the AUDIO button briefly to change the Audio functions.
After the AUDIO button is first pressed, the display will show thebass level value for the source activated at that time (e.g. in FM
mode the display will show the wording “FM Bass + 2”).
Use the or buttons to scroll through the menu functions. Tochange the setting of the function selected use the or buttons.
The current status of the function selected will be shown on thedisplay.
The functions managed by the Menu are:
❒ BASS (adjustment of bass tones);❒ TREBLE (adjustment of high tones);❒ BALANCE (right/left balance adjustment);❒ FADER (front/back balance adjustment);❒ LOUDNESS (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system)(activation/deactivation of LOUDNESS function);❒ EQUALIZER (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system)(activation and selection of factory equalizer settings);❒ USER EQUALISER (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system)(personalised equaliser settings).

Proceed as follows:❒ Use or buttons to set the “Bass” or “Treble” in the AUDIO
menu;❒ press the or button to increase/decrease the bass ortreble.
By pressing the buttons briefly, the levels will change progressively
in steps. By pressing them for longer, the levels will change quickly.

Proceed as follows:❒ Select the “Balance” setting in the AUDIO menu using the or
button;❒ press the button to increase the volume of the right speakers
or the button to increase the volume of the left speakers.
By pressing the buttons briefly, the levels will change progressively
in steps. By pressing them for longer, the levels will change quickly.
Select the value “ 0 ” to set the same level for the right andleft audio outputs.

SOUND-SYSTEMBALANCE ADJUSTMENT

Alfawiki.nl
271

FADER ADJUSTMENT

SOUND-SYSTEM

Proceed as follows:❒ Select the “Fader” setting in the AUDIO menu using the or
button;❒ press the button to increase the sound from the rear speakers
or the button to increase the sound from the front speakers.
By pressing the buttons briefly, the levels will change progressively
in steps. By pressing them for longer, the levels will change quickly.
Select the value “ 0 ” to set the same level for the front andrear audio outputs.
LOUDNESS FUNCTION(excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system)
The Loudness function improves the volume of the sound whilst
listening at low volumes, increasing the bass and treble.
To activate/deactivate the function, select the Loudness setting of
the AUDIO menu using the or buttons.
The condition of the function (on or off) is shown on the display fora few seconds by the wording “Loudness On” or “Loudness Off”.

PRESET/USER/CLASSIC/ROCK/JAZZ FUNCTIONS(equaliser activation/deactivation)(excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system)
The built-in equaliser can be activated/deactivated. When theequaliser function is off, the audio settings can only be changed byadjusting the “Bass” and “Treble” settings, whereas when thefunction is on, the acoustic curves can be adjusted.
To deactivate the equaliser, select the “EQ Preset” function using the
buttons or .
To activate the equaliser, use the or buttons to select one of
the adjustments:❒ “FM/AM/CD...EQ User” (adjustment of 7 equaliser bands thatcan be changed by the user);❒ “Classic” (equaliser preset for optimal classical music sound);❒ “Rock” (equaliser preset for optimal rock and pop music sound);❒ “Jazz” (equaliser preset for optimal jazz music sound).
When one of the equaliser settings is activated the letters “EQ”
light up.

Alfawiki.nl272

To set a personalised equaliser adjustment, set to “User” using theor button and press the MENU button.
A 7-bar graph appears on the display, in which each bar
represents a frequency.
Select the bar to adjust using the or buttons; the selected bar
will start to flash and it can be adjusted using the or buttons.
To store the setting, press the AUDIO button again. The display willshow the active source at that time followed by the word “USER”. If
the mode is “FM”, for example, the display will show the text “FM
EQ User”.
MENU
MENU button functions
Press the MENU button briefly to activate the Menu function. The
display will show the first menu item that can be adjusted (AF) (“AFSwitching On” on the display).
Use the or buttons to scroll through the menu functions. Tochange the setting of the function selected use the or buttons.
The current status of the function selected will be shown on thedisplay.

The functions managed by the Menu are:
❒ AF SWITCHING (ON/OFF);❒ TRAFFIC INFORMATION (ON/OFF);❒ REGIONAL MODE regional programmes (ON/OFF);❒ MP3 DISPLAY (CD MP3 display settings);❒ SPEED VOLUME (speed dependent automatic volume
adjustment) (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system);❒ RADIO ON VOLUME (maximum radio volume limit
activation/deactivation);❒ SPEECH VOLUME (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system)(telephone volume adjustment);❒ AUX OFFSET (alignment of the portable device volume to that of
the other sources);❒ RADIO OFF (switching-off mode);❒ SYSTEM RESET Press the Menu button again to exit the Menu
function.

SOUND-SYSTEMUSER EQ SETTINGS FUNCTION(equaliser settings only if the USER setting is selected)(excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system)

Note
The AF SWITCHING, TRAFFIC INFORMATION and REGIONAL
MODE adjustments are only possible in FM mode.

Alfawiki.nl
273

SOUND-SYSTEM

AF SWITCHING function(alternative frequency search)
The radio can operate in two different modes using RDS:
❒ “AF Switching On”: search for alternative frequencies active (theletters “AF” appear on the display);❒ “AF Switching Off”: search for alternative frequencies not active.
Proceed as follows to activate/deactivate the function:❒ press the MENU button and select “AF Switching On”;
❒ press the / buttons to activate/deactivate the function.
When the function is activated, the radio automatically tunes into
the station with the strongest signal broadcasting the same
programme. While driving, the same station can be continuously
listened to without having to change the frequency when you
change zones.
Obviously, it must be possible to receive the station that you arelistening to in the area you are driving through.
If the AF function has been activated, “AF” will light up in thedisplay.

If the AF function has been activated and the radio is not able toreceive the current station, the radio activates the automatic search,during which “FM Search” appears on the display (only for top-ofthe-range radios).
With the AF function deactivated, the remaining RDS functions,such as the display of the station name, still remain active.
The AF function can only be activated on FM bands.

Alfawiki.nl
274

Some stations on the FM band (FM1, FM2 and FMA) can
broadcast information about traffic conditions. In this case theletters “TA” appear on the display.
Proceed as follows to switch the TA function on/off:❒ press the MENU button briefly and select “Traffic info”;❒ press the / buttons to activate/deactivate the function.
If the TA function has been activated, the “TA” icon lights up on thedisplay.
Note
If the TA function is activated with an audio source other than Tuner(Radio) (CD, MP3, telephone or Mute/Pause), the radio can carryout an automatic search and therefore it is possible, whenreactivating the Tuner (Radio) source, that the frequency tuned into
is different from the one previously set.
With the TA function, it is possible to:❒ search only for RDS stations that broadcast in FM and areenabled to broadcast traffic information;❒ receive traffic information even when the CD player is inoperation;❒ receive traffic information at a minimum preset volume even withthe radio volume off.

Note
In some countries there are radio stations that, even with the TP
function activated, do not transmit traffic information (the “TP” icon
appears on the display).
If the radio is tuned to a station in the AM band, when TA is
activated it will tune into the last selected station in the FM1 band.
The volume at which the traffic news is transmitted depends on thelistening volume:❒ listening volume below 5: traffic news volume 5 (fixed value);❒ listening volume above 5: traffic news volume equal to listening
volume +1.
If the volume is changed during traffic news, the level will not beshown on the display; the new level will only be maintained during
the news.
While traffic information is being received, “TRAFFIC
INFORMATION” will appear on the display.
The TA function can be interrupted by pressing any button on theradio.

SOUND-SYSTEM

TRAFFIC INFORMATION function(traffic information)

Alfawiki.nl
275

SOUND-SYSTEMREGIONAL MODE function(regional transmission reception)

MP3 DISPLAY function(MP3 CD data display)

Some national broadcasters will transmit regional programmes atcertain times of the day (that vary from region to region).
This function makes it possible to tune into local (regional)
broadcasters automatically (see “EON function” paragraph).
If you want the radio to automatically tune into the regional
stations being broadcast on the selected network, the function mustbe activated.
To activate/deactivate the function use the or buttons.
The current status of the function appears on the display:❒ “Regional On”: function activated;❒ “Regional Off”: function deactivated.
If the function is deactivated and you have tuned into a regional
station working in a given area and you enter a different area,
then the regional station received in the new area will bebroadcast.

This function makes it possible to select the information shown by
the display when listening to a CD containing MP3 tracks.
The function can only be selected if an MP3 CD is inserted: in thiscase “MP3 Display” will appear on the display.
To change the function, use the or buttons.
The following settings are available:❒ “Title” (track title, if the ID3-TAG is available);❒ “Author” (track author, if the ID3-TAG is available);❒ “Album” (track album, if the ID3-TAG is available);❒ “Folder” name (name assigned to the folder);❒ “File” name (name assigned to the MP3 file).

Note
If the AF and REG functions are on at the same time, once aborder between two regions is crossed, the radio may not switch
correctly to a valid alternative frequency.

Alfawiki.nl
276

RADIO ON VOLUME function(maximum radio volume limit
activation/deactivation)

This function automatically adapts the volume level to the speed of
the car, increasing the volume when the speed increases tomaintain the ratio with the noise level inside the passenger
compartment.
To activate/deactivate the function, press the / buttons. The
words “Speed volume” appear on the display, followed by thecurrent status of the function:❒ Off: function deactivated❒ Low: function activated (low sensitivity)❒ High: function activated (high sensitivity).

This function makes it possible to activate/deactivate the maximum
volume limit when the radio is turned on.
The display shows the function status:❒ “Radio on vol – Limit on”: when the radio is switched on thevolume level will be: – if the volume level is equal to or higher
than the maximum value, the radio will switch on at the
maximum volume;– if the volume level is between the minimum and maximum values,
the radio will switch on at the same volume as before it was
switched off;
– if the volume level is equal to or lower than the minimum value,
the radio will switch on at the minimum volume.
❒ “Radio on vol – Limit off”: the radio will switch on at the volumelevel it was at before switching off. The volume may be between
0 and 40.
To change the setting of the selected function, use the /buttons.

SOUND-SYSTEM

SPEED VOLUME function(speed-based volume change)(excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system)

Alfawiki.nl277

SOUND-SYSTEM

NOTES❒ Using the Menu it is only possible to adjust theactivation/deactivation of the function and not the minimum or
maximum volume value.
❒ If the “TA” or “TEL” functions or an external audio source are
activated when the radio is turned on, the radio will switch on at
the volume set for these sources. When the external audio source
is deactivated, the volume can be adjusted between theminimum and maximum levels.
❒ If the battery charge is low, it will not be possible to adjust thevolume between the minimum and maximum levels.

AUX OFFSET function(alignment of the portable device volume with that of
the other sources)
This function enables the alignment of the volume of the AUX
source, depending on its own portable player, with that of theother sources.
To activate the function, press the MENU button and select “AUX
offset”.
Press the or buttons to decrease or increase the volume value(set from – 6 to + 6).

SPEECH VOLUME function(telephone volume adjustment)This function makes it possible to adjust (settings from 1 to 40), by
turning the ON/OFF left knob/button or pressing the /buttons, or exclude (OFF setting) the volume of the Telephone, of
the Blue&Me™ (except the Media Player function).
The display shows the current function status:❒ “Speech Off”: function deactivated.
❒ “Speech volume 23”: function active with volume setting 23.

Alfawiki.nl
278

RADIO OFF function(on and off mode)

TELEPHONE SETUPSYSTEM RESET function
This function is used to restore all settings to the factory values.
The options are:❒ NO: no restore intervention;❒ YES: the default parameters will be restored. During thisoperation, the word “Resetting” appears on the display. At theend of the operation, the source does not change and theprevious situation will be displayed.

If a hands-free kit is installed on the car, when there is an incoming
phone call the radio audio will be connected to the telephone
output.
The telephone audio always arrives at a fixed volume, but it can be
adjusted during a conversation using the ON/OFF button/knob.
The fixed telephone audio volume can be adjusted using the“SPEECH VOLUME” function in the Menu. The word “PHONE”
appears on the display during telephone audio deactivation.
ANTI-THEFT PROTECTION
The radio is equipped with an anti-theft protection system based on
the exchange of information between the radio and the electronic
control unit (Body Computer) on the car.
This system guarantees maximum safety and avoids the entry of
the secret code each time the radio power supply is disconnected.
If the check has a positive outcome, the radio will start to function,
whereas if the comparison codes are not the same or if theelectronic control unit (Body Computer) is replaced, the device will
ask the user to enter the secret code according to the proceduredescribed in the paragraph below.

SOUND-SYSTEM

This function is used to set the radio switching-off mode to one oftwo different settings.
To activate the function, use the or button.
The selected mode will appear on the display:❒ “00 MIN”: the radio switches off automatically in connection
with the ignition key; the radio switches off automatically assoon as the key is turned to STOP position;❒ “20 MIN”: the radio switches off independently of the ignition
key; the radio remains switched on for a maximum period of 20
minutes after the key has been turned to STOP position.

Alfawiki.nl279

SOUND-SYSTEMEntering the secret code

Code Card

When the radio is switched on, if the code is requested, the display
will show “Radio code” for about 2 seconds followed by four
dashes “- - - -”.
The code is made up of four numbers from 1 to 6, eachcorresponding to one of the dashes.
To enter the first digit of the code, press the corresponding buttonof the pre-selected stations (from 1 to 6). Enter the other code
numbers in the same way.
If the four digits are not entered within 20 seconds, the display willshow “Enter code - - - -”. If this occurs, it is not considered anincorrect code entry.
After entering the fourth digit (within 20 seconds), the radio will
start to operate.
If an incorrect code is entered, the radio will emit a sound and thedisplay shows the text “Radio blocked/ wait” to notify the user ofthe need to enter the correct code.
Each time the user enters an incorrect code, the waiting time will
gradually increase (1 min, 2 min, 4 min, 8 min, 16 min, 30 min, 1
h, 2 h, 4 h, 8 h, 16 h, 24 h) up to a maximum of 24 hours.
The waiting time will be shown on the display with the text “Radio
blocked/wait”. After the text has disappeared it is possible to start
the code entry procedure again.

This document certifies ownership of the radio. The Code Card
contains the model of the radio, the serial number and the secret
code.
Note
Keep this Code Card in a safe place so that you can give theinformation to the relevant authorities if the car radio is stolen.

Alfawiki.nl
280

INTRODUCTION
When the radio is switched on, the last function selected before it
was switched off is activated: Radio, CD, CD MP3 or Media Player(only with Blue&Me™) or AUX (only with Blue&Me™) (forversions/markets, where provided).
To select the Radio function when another audio source is being
listened to, briefly press the FM AS or AM buttons depending on
the desired band.
Once the Radio mode has been activated, the display will show thename (RDS stations only) and the frequency of the selected radio
station, the frequency band selected (e.g. FM1) and the preselectbutton number (e.g. P1).

FREQUENCY BAND SELECTION
With the Radio mode active, press the FM AS or AM button briefly
and repeatedly to select the desired reception band.
Each time the button is pressed the following bands are selected
cyclically:❒ By pressing the FM AS button: “FM1”, “FM2” or “FMA”;❒ By pressing the AM button: “MW1, MW2”.
Each band is highlighted by the name in the display. The last
station selected on the respective frequency band will be tuned
into.
The FM band is divided into sections: FM1, FM2 or “FMA”; theFMA reception band is reserved for broadcasters storedautomatically using the AutoSTore function.

SOUND-SYSTEM

RADIO (TUNER)

Alfawiki.nl
281

SOUND-SYSTEMPRESET BUTTONSAUTOMATIC TUNING

The buttons numbered from 1 to 6 are used to set the following
preset stations:❒ 18 in the FM band (6 in FM1, 6 in FM2, 6 in FMT or “FMA” (onsome versions));❒ 12 in the MW band (6 in MW1, 6 in MW2).
To listen to a preset station, select the desired frequency band andthen briefly press the corresponding preset button (from 1 to 6).
By pressing the preset button for more than 2 seconds, the current
station will be stored.
The storing phase is confirmed by an acoustic signal.

Briefly press the or button to start the automatic tuning
search for the next station that can be received in the selected
direction.
If the or button is pressed down longer, the fast search starts.
When the button is released, the tuner will stop on the next stationthat can be received.
If the TA function (traffic alerts) is on, the tuner will only search forstations that broadcast traffic news and alerts.

STORING THE LAST STATION LISTENED TO
The radio automatically stores the last station that was selected foreach reception band, which is then tuned into when the radio isturned on or when the reception band is changed.

MANUAL TUNING
This is used to manually search for stations in the preselected band.
Select the desired frequency band and then press the or
button briefly and repeatedly to start to the search in the desired
direction.
If the or buttons are pressed longer, the fast search will startand then stop when the button is released.

Alfawiki.nl282

To activate the AutoSTore function, hold the FM AS button down
until an acoustic signal is heard. With this function, the radio
automatically stores the 6 stations with the strongest signal indecreasing order on the FMA frequency band.
During the automatic storing process, the word “Autostore” flashes
on the display.
Press the FM AS button again to interrupt the AutoSTore function:
the radio will again tune into the station listened to before theactivation of the function.
When the AutoSTore function has finished, the radio willautomatically tune into the first preset station on the FMA bandstored on the preset side 1.
The stations that have a strong signal in the preselected band atthat moment, are then automatically stored on the buttons
numbered from 1 to 6.
When the AutoSTore function is activated within the MW band, theFMA band is automatically selected and the function is performed
there.

Note
Sometimes the AutoSTore function is not able to find 6 stations witha strong signal. In this case, the strongest stations will be
duplicated in the free preset buttons.
Note
When the AutoSTore function is activated, the stations that werepreviously stored in the FMA band are deleted.

SOUND-SYSTEMAUTOSTORE FUNCTION(automatic station storing)

Alfawiki.nl
283

EON FUNCTION (Enhanced Other Network)

The radio is configured to receive emergency alerts in RDS mode in
exceptional circumstances or where dangerous situations arepresent (earthquakes, floods, etc.) if these are being transmitted by
the current broadcaster.
This function is activated automatically and cannot be turned off.
The word “Alarm” will be shown in the display during thetransmission of an emergency announcement. The volume of theradio will change during this announcement in the same way as
during a traffic bulletin.

In some countries, there are circuits that group multiple
broadcasters that transmit traffic information together. In this case,the programme of the station that is being listened to will betemporarily interrupted to:❒ receive traffic alerts (only with the TA function activated);❒ listen to regional transmissions each time these are broadcast by
one of the broadcasters on the same circuit.

SOUND-SYSTEMEMERGENCY ALARM RECEPTION

Alfawiki.nl
284

STEREOPHONIC BROADCASTERS

CD PLAYER

If the incoming signal is weak, playback is automatically switchedfrom Stereo to Mono.

INTRODUCTION
This section describes the variants regarding the operation of the
CD player: as far as the operation of the radio is concerned, referto the description in the “Functions and Adjustments” chapter.

To activate the CD player built into the equipment, proceed asfollows:❒ insert a CD with the equipment switched on: the first track will
start to play;or❒ if a CD has already been loaded, switch on the radio and thenbriefly press the CD button to select the “CD” operating mode:
the last track listened to will start to play.
It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure optimum playback. If
CD-R/RWs are used, we recommend using good quality media
mastered at the slowest speed possible.

SOUND-SYSTEM

SELECTING THE CD PLAYER

Alfawiki.nl285

SOUND-SYSTEMLOADING/EJECTING A CD

Possible error messages

To load the CD, insert it gently into the slot to activate the motorised
loading system, which will position it correctly.
The CD can be loaded with radio off and the ignition key turned to
MAR: in this case the radio will remain off. When the radio isturned on, the last source listened to prior to switching off will be
activated.
When a CD is inserted the display will show the symbol “CD-IN”
and the text “CD Reading”. They will remain displayed for theentire time required for the radio to read the CD tracks. When thistime has elapsed the radio will automatically start to play the first
track.
Press the button with the radio on to activate the motorised
ejection of the CD. After ejection, the last audio source listened tobefore playing the CD will be heard.
If the CD is not removed from the radio, it will automatically be
reloaded about 20 seconds later and the Tuner mode will be
activated (Radio).
The CD cannot be ejected if the radio is off.
If the ejected CD is reloaded without having removed it completelyfrom the slot, the radio will not switch to the CD source.

If the CD loaded cannot be read (e.g. a CD ROM has been
inserted or the CD is inserted upside down or there is reading
error) the display will show the text “CD Disc error”.
The CD will then be ejected and the audio source activated prior to
the CD mode selection will be heard.
With an external audio source activated (“TA”, “ALARM” or“Phone”), the CD that cannot be read will not be ejected until thesefunctions have ended. At the end, with the CD mode activated, thedisplay will show the text “CD Disc error” for a few seconds andthen the CD will be ejected.

Alfawiki.nl
286

DISPLAY INFORMATIONTRACK FAST FORWARD/REWIND

When the CD player is working, the display will show thefollowing information:❒ “CD Track 5”: indicates the number of the CD track;❒ “03:42”: indicates the time elapsed since the start of the track (ifthe relevant Menu function is activated).

The fast forward/rewind will stop once the button is released.

Briefly press the button to play the previous CD track and the
button to play the next track.
The tracks are selected cyclically: the first track is selected after thelast track and vice versa.
If the track has been played for more than 3 seconds, pressing the
button will cause the track to be started again from the
beginning.
In this case, if you want to play the previous track, press the button
twice consecutively.

To pause the CD player, press the button. The text “CD Pause”
appears on the display.
To resume listening to the track, press the button again.
If another audio source is selected, the pause function isdeactivated.

SOUND-SYSTEM

TRACK SELECTION (forward/back)

PAUSE FUNCTION

Alfawiki.nl287

MP3 CD PLAYERINTRODUCTION
This section only describes the variants regarding the operation of
the CD MP3 player: as far as the operation of the radio isconcerned, refer to the description in the “Radio” and “CD MP3
Player” sections.
NOTE MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.

SOUND-SYSTEM

MP3 MODEIn addition to playing regular audio CDs, the radio is also able toplay CD-ROMs on which audio files have been stored using theMP3 compression format. The radio operates as described in the“CD Player” section when an ordinary audio CD is inserted.
To guarantee optimal playback quality it is advisable to use goodquality CDs mastered at the lowest speed possible.
The files on an MP3 CD are structured by folder, creating lists of all
the folders containing MP3 tracks (folders and subfolders are all
displayed on the same level); the folders that do not contain MP3
tracks cannot be selected.

The operating conditions and specifications for playing MP3 files
are as follows:❒ the CD-ROMs used should be burnt according to the ISO 9660
standard;❒ the music files must have an “.mp3” extension: files with adifferent extension cannot be played;❒ the following sampling frequencies can be played: 44.1 kHz,
stereo (96 to 320 kbit/s) - 22.05 kHz, mono or stereo (32 to 80
kbit/s);❒ tracks with a variable bit-rate can be reproduced.
Note
The names of tracks must not contain the following characters:
spaces, ' (apostrophes), ( and ) (open and close brackets). Whenburning an MP3 CD, make sure that the names of the files do notcontain these characters; if they do, the radio will not be able toplay the tracks involved.

Alfawiki.nl
288

SELECTING MP3 SESSIONS ON HYBRID DISCSDISPLAY INFORMATION

Note
When the function is activated the radio may take a few seconds tostart playing. Whilst checking the disc the display will show “CD
READING”. If no MP3 files are detected, the radio will resume
playing the audio session from the point where it was interrupted.

ID3-TAG information display
In addition to the information relating to the time elapsed, thename of the folder and the name of the file, the radio is also
capable of displaying ID3-TAG information relating to the Track
Title, Artist and Author.
The name of the MP3 folder shown on the display corresponds tothe name with which the folder was stored on the CD, followed byan asterisk.
Example of a complete MP3 folder name: BEST OF *.
When ID3-TAG data is chosen to be displayed (Title, Artist, Album)
that has not been recorded for the track played, the information
will be replaced by that relating to the name of the file.

SOUND-SYSTEM

If a hybrid disc is inserted (Mixed Mode, Enhanced, CD-Extra) also
containing MP3 files, the radio automatically starts playing theaudio session. It is possible to switch to the MP3 session whilst
playing by holding the MEDIA button down for more than 2seconds.

Alfawiki.nl289

SOUND-SYSTEM

SELECTING NEXT/PREVIOUS FOLDERSTRUCTURE OF THE FOLDERS

Press the button to select a subsequent folder or press the
button to select a previous folder.
The display will show the number and the name of the folder (e.g.
“DIR 2 XXXXXX”).
XXXXXX: name of the folder (the display will only show the first 8
characters).
The folders are selected cyclically: the first folder is selected after
the last folder and vice versa.
If no other folder/track is selected in the next 2 seconds, the first
track on the new folder will be played.
If the last track in the folder at that moment selected is played, thenext folder will be played.

The radio with MP3 player:❒ recognises only the folders that contain MP3 format files;❒ if the MP3 files on a CD-ROM are structured in sub-folders, theirstructure is compressed to a single level structure where the subfolders are taken to the level of the main folders.

Alfawiki.nl
290

AUX (only with the Blue&Me™ system)

IMPORTANT(for versions/markets, where provided)
INTRODUCTION

AUX MODE
To activate the AUX source, press the MEDIA button or the SRC
control on the steering wheel several times until the corresponding
source is displayed.

SOUND-SYSTEM

This section describes the variants regarding the operation of the
AUX source: as far as the operation of the radio is concerned, referto the description in the “Functions and Adjustments” section.

The functions of the device connected to the AUX socket are directly
managed by the device itself; it is not possible to change
track/folder/playlist with radio or steering wheel controls.
Do not leave the cable of your portable player connected to the
AUX socket after disconnection, to avoid possible hiss from the
speakers.
NOTE The AUX socket is not incorporated in the radio. For its
position, refer to the Blue&Me™ Supplement and its Quick
Guide.

Alfawiki.nl
291

TROUBLESHOOTING

MP3 FILE READING

GENERAL

Track skips during MP3 file playback

Low volume

The CD is scratched or dirty. Clean the CD, referring to the contentsof the “CD” paragraph in the “Introduction” section.

The Fader function should be adjusted only to the values “F” (front)
to prevent a reduction in radio output power and the muting of thevolume if the Fader level adjustment is equal to R+9.

The duration of the MP3 tracks is not shown correctly

SOUND-SYSTEM

Source cannot be selected

In some cases (due to the recording mode) the duration of the MP3
tracks may be displayed incorrectly.

Nothing has been inserted.
Insert the CD or CD MP3 to be played.
CD PLAYER
The CD does not play
The CD is dirty. Clean the CD.
The CD is scratched. Try and use another CD.
The CD cannot be loaded
A CD is already loaded. Press the

button and remove the CD.

Alfawiki.nl
292

Alfawiki.nl

Alfawiki.nl

327-336 Alfa 159 GB.qxp

16-02-2011

14:08

Pagina 327

NOTES

Alfawiki.nl

327-336 Alfa 159 GB.qxp

16-02-2011

14:08

Pagina 328

Alfawiki.nl

327-336 Alfa 159 GB.qxp

16-02-2011

14:08

Pagina 329

Alfawiki.nl

327-336 Alfa 159 GB.qxp

16-02-2011

14:08

Pagina 328

Alfawiki.nl

327-336 Alfa 159 GB.qxp

16-02-2011

14:08

Pagina 329

Alfawiki.nl

327-336 Alfa 159 GB.qxp

16-02-2011

14:08

Pagina 328

Alfawiki.nl

INDEXABS system........................................ 101– Mechanical Brake Assist................... 102– System intervention.......................... 101
Additional heater ................................. 69
Air cleaner .......................................... 202
Alarm ................................................. 46“Alfa DNA” system............................. 106"Alfa DNA" (system) ............................ 106“Alfa DNA” system– Driving modes................................. 106– Engagement/disengagement of"All Weather" mode ........................ 108– Engagement/disengagement of"Dynamic" mode............................. 107– "Natural" Mode.............................. 106

Alfa Romeo Code system .................... 39
Ashtray ............................................... 84
ASR system (AntiSlip Regulation) ........... 104
Automatic dual zone climate control ...... 62

Battery .............................................. 203– advice for extending lifetime............. 203– replacement .................................... 203
Battery (recharging).............................. 184

Body versions....................................... 214
Bodywork– bodywork codes.............................. 214– maintenance ................................... 209– protection against atmosphericagents ............................................ 209– warranty......................................... 209
Bonnet................................................. 97– Closing........................................... 98– Opening......................................... 97
Brake Assist ......................................... 104
Brakes................................................. 224– brake fluid level............................... 202
bulb replacement .......................... 171-172– interior lights................................... 173
Bulb replacement– exterior lights .................................. 169
Bulbs– types of bulbs.................................. 167

Cigar lighter ........................................ 83

Cleaning and maintenance– bodywork ....................................... 209– car interior...................................... 211– engine compartment........................ 210– front headlights ............................... 210– leather parts ................................... 211– leather seats.................................... 211– plastic and coated parts................... 211– seats and fabric parts ...................... 211– windows......................................... 210
Climate control/heating system ............. 57
Climatic comfort................................... 56– Diffusers ......................................... 56
Clutch ................................................. 223
CO2 emissions..................................... 250
Code Card........................................... 40
Control buttons..................................... 27
Control panel and instruments ............... 4
Carrying children safely ...................... 130 – Multifunction display........................ 4
CBC system (Cornering Brake Control) ... 105 – Reconfigurable multifunction
display ........................................... 5
Central locking..................................... 81
Controls............................................... 80
Changing a bulb.................................. 166– General instructions......................... 166 Courtesy light
Alfawiki.nl 154 – bulb replacement............................. 174
Changing a wheel................................

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

301

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

302

Cruise Control...................................... 75 Engine compartment
Dashboard ........................................ 3 – checking levels ................................ 193
Daytime running lights (DRL) ................. 69 – washing ......................................... 210
Diesel filter .......................................... 202 Engine coolant temperature gauge ........ 6
Dimensions.......................................... 235 Engine– engine cooling system fluid level....... 201
Dipped headlights– bulb replacement............................. 170 – identification codes.......................... 214
Direction indicators .............................. 71 – marking.......................................... 213– bulb replacement............................. 170 – technical specifications..................... 216– “Lane change” function.................... 71 Engine oil
Display................................................ 24 – consumption ................................... 200
Doors.................................................. 88 – level check ...................................... 200– Door central locking/unlocking ........ 88 EOBD system ....................................... 114
Driver side knee bag ............................ 139 Exterior lights....................................... 69– Left stalk ......................................... 69
DST system (Dynamic Steering
Torque).............................................. 105 External courtesy lights ......................... 72
Dusk sensor ......................................... 70 Extinguisher......................................... 84
Dynamic Suspension (active shock
Fitting "Universal" child seat ................ 131
absorber system)................................ 113
Fix&Go Automatic Kit........................... 161
Electric power steering ........................ 114 Flashing .............................................. 71
Electric sun roof ................................... 85 Fluids and lubricants (specifications) ...... 245
Electric windows .................................. 90 Fog lights........................................ 80-171– Controls.......................................... 90 "Follow Me Home" device ................... 71

Front driver side airbag ........................ 138
Front passenger airbag......................... 138
Front roof light– bulb replacement............................. 173
Fuel consumption.................................. 248
Fuel cut-off system ................................ 81
Fuel level gauge ................................... 6
Fuel supply .......................................... 222
Fuel tank cap ....................................... 122
Fuses (if a fuse blows)........................... 176

Gear Shift Indicator............................ 26
Glove compartment.............................. 82
Glove compartment light– bulb replacement............................. 174

Handbrake ........................................ 145

Hazard warning lights.......................... 80
Headlights ........................................... 100– Adjusting headlights abroad ............ 101– bulb replacement............................. 169– Headlight alignment corrector .......... 100– Light beam direction ........................ 100
Headlight washers................................ 208
Head restraints..................................... 52"Electronic Q2" system ("E-Q2") .......... 105 Front airbags...................................... 137 – "Anti-Whiplash" device ................... 52
Alfawiki.nl
Engine codes ...................................... 214 Front armrest....................................... 82 – Front headrests................................ 52

– Rear head restraints......................... 53
Hill Holder system ................................ 103

Identification data
– bodywork paint plate....................... 213– Chassis marking.............................. 213– engine marking............................... 213– identification data plate ................... 212
Ignition device ..................................... 48– Steering lock................................... 48
Installation of electrical/electronic
devices.............................................. 116
Installing a Universal Isofix child seat ..... 135
Interior fittings...................................... 82
Interiors (cleaning)................................ 211

Jack................................................... 155
Light clusters– front light clusters (changing abulb) .............................................. 169– rear light clusters (changing abulb) .............................................. 171
Lubricants (specifications)...................... 245
Luggage compartment .......................... 94– Closing the luggage compartment..... 95– Emergency luggage compartment
opening.......................................... 94– Extending the luggage
compartment................................... 96– Luggage compartment
initialisation .................................... 95– Opening the luggage
compartment................................... 94
Luggage compartment roof light– bulb replacement............................. 173
Main beam headlights ....................... 71– bulb replacement............................. 169
Maintenance and care– heavy-duty use of the car ................. 192– periodic checks ............................... 192– scheduled servicing ......................... 187– scheduled servicing plan.................. 188
Menu options....................................... 29
MSR system ......................................... 104
Multifunction display ............................ 24
Number plate lights– bulb replacement............................. 172
Parking ............................................. 145– Handbrake ..................................... 145
Parking lights ....................................... 70
Parking sensors.................................... 117
Performance ........................................ 236
Alfawiki.nl 216
Plugs (type)..........................................

Pollen filter........................................... 202
Power sockets....................................... 83
Preparation for "Isofix" child seat .......... 134
Preparation to install a portablenavigation system .............................. 115
Pretensioners........................................ 127– Load limiters ................................... 127
Protecting the environment .................... 123– Particulate filter (DPF)....................... 123
Puddle light– bulb replacement............................. 175
Radio transmitters and mobile
phones.............................................. 116
Rain sensor.......................................... 73
Raising the car..................................... 185
Rear fog light....................................... 80
Rear fog light/reversing light................. 172
Rear view mirrors................................. 54– Door mirrors ................................... 55– Internal mirror................................. 54
Rear window washer jets ...................... 208
Rear window washer– rear window washer fluid level......... 201
Rear window washer/wiper.................. 74
Rear Window Wiper– blade replacement........................... 207

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

303

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCY– blades ............................................ 206
Reconfigurable multifunction display ...... 25
Refuelling ............................................ 241
Refuelling the car ................................. 122
Rev counter.......................................... 6
Rim Protector ....................................... 229
Roof lights ........................................... 77– Courtesy lights ................................ 78– Front roof light ................................ 77– Glove compartment light.................. 79– Luggage compartment roof light ....... 79– Puddle lights ................................... 78
Roof rack/ski rack................................ 99

Safe Lock device................................. 43
SERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

304

Saving fuel .......................................... 148
SBR system (Seat Belt Reminder) ............ 125
Scheduled Servicing Plan...................... 188
Seat belts............................................. 124– Use ................................................ 124
Seats................................................... 49– Easy Entry ...................................... 51– Front seats ...................................... 49– Sports configuration front seats......... 51
Setup menu ......................................... 27

Side airbags (Side Bags - WindowBags) ................................................ 139
Side bags (front side airbags) ............... 140
Side lights/brake lights......................... 171
Side lights/daytime running lights(DRL)– bulb replacement............................. 169
Side lights/dipped beam headlights ...... 70“Smart Bag” system (Multistage front
airbags)............................................ 137
Snow chains....................................... 151
Snow tyres........................................... 151
Speedometer (speed indicator) .............. 6
Starting the engine ............................... 143
Starting the engine ............................... 153– Bump starting.................................. 154– Jump starting .................................. 153
Start&Stop system ................................ 109
Steering lock........................................ 48
Steering system .................................... 226
Steering wheel ..................................... 53
Storing the car ..................................... 152
Sun visors............................................ 84
Suspension .......................................... 225
Symbols .............................................. 39
TechnicalAlfawiki.nl
specifications ....................... 212

The keys ..............................................
– Code Card......................................
– Key without remote control ...............
– Key with remote control....................

40
40
41
41

Third brake lights– bulb replacement............................. 172
Towing the car ..................................... 185– Attaching the tow hook.................... 185
Towing trailers ..................................... 150– Installing a tow hook........................ 150
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System) ............................................. 119
Transmission ........................................ 223
TRIP button .......................................... 38
Trip Computer ...................................... 36
Tyres– Fix&Go Automatic (kit) .................... 161– inflation pressure............................. 233– reading the tyre code....................... 227– Rim Protector tyres........................... 229– snow tyres ...................................... 230– tyres provided ................................. 230
Tyres - maintenance.............................. 204

Using the Gearbox............................. 146

VDC system (Vehicle Dynamics

Windscreen wiper
Control) ............................................ 103 – blades ............................................ 206
Warning lights on panel .................... 7 – replacing wiper blades .................... 206
Weights............................................... 237 Wiring for radio system........................ 115
Welcome movement ............................. 26
Wheel rims
– correct reading of the rim code......... 228– dimensions ..................................... 230– Rim Protector................................... 229– rims and tyres ................................. 227– wheels and tyres.............................. 204
Wheels and tyres– changing a wheel............................ 154– Fix&Go Automatic (kit) .................... 161– spare wheel .................................... 227– tyre inflation pressure....................... 233– Wheels and tyres ............................ 204
Window bags (side airbags for headprotection)......................................... 140
Window cleaning................................. 72
Windows (cleaning) ............................. 210
Windscreen washer– windscreen washer fluid level ........... 201
Windscreen washer sprays ................... 208
Windscreen washer/wiper.................... 72
Alfawiki.nl– “Smart washing” function................. 73

GETTING TO KNOWYOUR CARSAFETYSTARTING AND
DRIVINGIN AN EMERGENCYSERVICING AND
MAINTENANCETECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

305

PARTS&SERVICESTECHNICAL SERVICES - SERVICE ENGINEERING
Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia )Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.
Print no. 60438472 - 1 Edition - 04/2012
All rights reserved. Reproduction, even partial, is prohibited without written authorisationfrom Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.

Alfawiki.nl

COP_Alfa MiTo GB

8-03-2012

8:54

Pagina 2

WHY CHOOSINGGENUINE PARTS

We really know your car because we invented, designed and built it: we really know every single detail.
At Alfa Romeo Service authorised workshops you can find technicians directly trained by us,
offering quality and professionalism for all service operations.
Alfa Romeo workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations, season checks
and practical recommendations by our experts.
With Alfa Romeo Genuine Parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance featuresof your new car unchanged in time: that's why you bought it for.
Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our cars; we recommend them because
they come from our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies.
For all these reasons: rely on Genuine Parts, because they are the only ones
designed by Alfa Romeo for your car.

SAFETY:BRAKING SYSTEMENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS,
CLIMATE CONTROL MAINTENANCECOMFORT: SUSPENSION
AND WINDSCREEN WIPERSPERFORMANCE: SPARK PLUGS,INJECTORS AND BATTERIESLINEACCESSORIROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS

Alfawiki.nl

COP_Alfa MiTo GB

8-03-2012

8:54

Pagina 1

ENGLISHOWNER HANDBOOK

Alfawiki.nl
Alfa Services